AR-F152

CODE: 00ZARF152/A1E

DIGITAL COPIER

(AR-F152)

MODEL
CONTENTS

AR-151 AR-156 AR-F152

[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 [ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 [ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 [ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . 4 - 1 [ 5 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 [ 6 ] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 [ 7 ] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 [ 8 ] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1

[ 9 ] SIMULATION, FAX SOFTWARE SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 [10] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 [11] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1 [12] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1 [13] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1

Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

SHARP CORPORATION

This document has been published to be used for after sales service only. The contents are subject to change without notice.

AR-F152

CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved on the eyes retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina. The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of servicing. 1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a unit, not as individual parts. 2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner cartridge, and drum cartridge. 3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected when removing and installing the optical system. 4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch. Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.

CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION, WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

VARO !
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE L KATSO STEESEEN.

VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG BERBRCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRLNING VED BNING, NR SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR STRLNING.

VARNING !
LASER WAVE LENGTH : 780 795 Pulse times : 0.481 ms/6 mm Out put power : 0.20 0.03 mW OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD OCH SPRREN R URKOPPLAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRLEN. STRLEN R FARLIG.

AR-F152

At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57 MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is maintained constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC). Even if the APC circuit fails in operation for some reason, the maximum output power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1 MICRO-SEC. Giving an accessible emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT which is still-less than the limit of CLASS-1 laser product.

Caution This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure continued safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.

VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KYTTMINEN MUULLA KUIN TSS KYTTOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KYTTJN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTVLLE NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE.

VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVNDS P ANNAT STT N I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVNDAREN UTSTTAS FR OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING, SOM VERSKRIDER GRNSEN FR LASERKLASS 1.

The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V model, 230V model and 240V model.

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

AR-F152

[1] GENERAL
1. AR-151/156/F152 major functions
Item CPM Model AR-151 AR-156 AR-F152 15CPM 15CPM 15CPM MB MB MB Opt Opt 2 1 Opt 1 Opt SB/MB 2 tray SPF R-SPF FAX GDI with USB Opt Opt Opt GDI without USB SOPM Duplex

Descriptions of items CPM: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute) SB/MB: SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi bypass 2 tray: Second cassette unit. The 1 tray unit (AR-DE9) is optionally available. SPF: Original feed unit R-SPF: Duplex original feed unit FAX: FAX function. The AR-FX3 (FAX-SPF and FAX board) is optionally available.) GDI with USB: GDI printer function with USB. The AR-PG1 (GDI + USB kit) is optionally available. GDI without USB: GDI printer function without USB. The said model has no option of it. SOPM: Scan One Print Many function (Many copies are made by one scan.) Duplex: Auto duplex copy function Descriptions of table : Standard provision : No function or no option available 1: Incompatible between SPF and FAX function 2: 1 tray option for Europe

2. System Configuration

(AR-151)

(AR-F152)

(AR-156)

(Options)

AR-SP3

AR-DE9

AR-FX3

AR-PG1

1 1

AR-F152

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications of copier
A. Basic specifications
Item Type Copy system Segment (class) External dimensions (W D H) (mm) Spec. Desktop Dry, electrostatic Digital personal copier AR-151: 518mm 482.6mm 292.6mm AR-156: 518mm 482.6mm 379mm AR-F152: 518mm 482.6mm 465.3mm AR-151: Approx. 19Kg, (drum cartridges included) AR-156: Approx. 22Kg, (drum cartridges included) AR-F152: Approx. 25Kg, (drum cartridges included)

Weight

B. Operation specification
Section Paper feed system Paper size Tray paper feed section Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds AB system Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed section Multi bypass paper feed section Paper feed capacity Kinds 1 Remark Paper size Tray paper feed section Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Inch system Remark Paper size Multi bypass paper feed section Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds 1 Remark Paper size Paper weight AB system Paper for Duplex (AR-156 only) Inch system Kinds 1: OHP, Label, Postal card: each 1 pc. Kinds Paper size Paper weight Item Details Spec. AR-151/AR-156: 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets) AR-F152: 2 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets) (1 tray for Europe) A4, B5, A5 (Landscape) 56 80g/m2 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of paper guide available A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape) 52 128g/m2 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Postal card User adjustment of paper guide available 8-1/2 14, 8-1/2 11, 8-1/2 5-1/2 (Landscape) 15 21 lbs. 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of paper guide available 8-1/2 14, 8-1/2 11, 8-1/2 5-1/2, 3-1/2 5-1/2 (Landscape) 14 34.5 lbs. 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Postal card User adjustment of paper guide available A4, B5, A5 (Landscape) 56 80 g/m2 Standard paper, Specified paper, Recycled paper 8-1/2 14, 8-1/2 11, 8-1/2 5-1/2 (Landscape) 15-21 lbs Standard paper, Specified paper, Recycled paper

2 1

AR-F152 Section Exit way Paper exit section Capacity of output tray Original set Max. original size Originals Original kinds Original size detection Scanning system CCD sensor Optical section Scanning section Lighting lamp Resolution Type Voltage Power consumption Gradation Writing section Writing system Laser unit Photoconductor Resolution Type Life Image forming Charging system Charger Transfer system Separation system Developing Cleaning Fusing system Upper heat roller Fusing section Lower heat roller Heater lamp Type Type Type Voltage Power consumption Power source Voltage Frequency Electrical section Power consumption Max. Average (during copying) *1) Average (stand-by) *1) Pre-heat mode *
1) 1)

Item

Details

Spec. Face down 100 sheets Center Registration (left edge) B4 (10 14) sheet None CCD sensor scanning by lighting lamp scanner 400 dpi Xenon lamp 1.5kV 11 3W 256 gradations/8bit Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser 600 dpi OPC (30) 18k Saw -tooth charging with a grid, / () scorotron discharge (+) DC corotron system () DC corotron system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation) Heat roller system Teflon roller Silicon rubber roller Halogen lamp 100V 800W Local AC voltage Common use for 50 and 60Hz AR-151/AR-156: 1000W, AR-F152: 1000W AR-151/AR-156: 310Wh/H, AR-F152: 310Wh/H AR-151/AR-156: 70Wh/H, AR-F152: 90Wh/H AR-151/AR-156: 40Wh/H, AR-F152: 51Wh/H AR-151/AR-156: 18Wh/H, AR-F152: 23Wh/H

Developing system Cleaning system

Auto power shut-off mode * *1) May fluctuate due to environmental conditions and the input voltage.

C. Copy performance
Section Copy magnification Item Fixed magnification ratios Zooming magnification ratios Manual steps (manual, photo) Details Spec. 3R + 2E (AB system: 50, 70, 81, 100, 141, 200%) (Inch system: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200%) 50 200% (151 steps in 1% increments) 5 steps

2 2

AR-F152 Section Item Details Tray paper feed Copy speed First copy time Manual paper feed AB system: A4 (Landscape) Same size Copy speed (CPM) Enlargement Reduction Same size B5 (Landscape) Copy speed (CPM) Enlargement Reduction Inch system 8-1/2 14 (Landscape) Same size Copy speed (CPM) Enlargement Reduction 8-1/2 11 (Landscape) Max. continuous copy quantity Leading edge Trailing edge Void area Void Side edge void area Same size Copy speed (CPM) Enlargement Reduction Spec. 9.6 sec. or below (A4), 9.4 sec. or below (8-1/2" 14") (Pre-heat mode: 16 sec. or below / Auto powershut-off mode: 23 sec. or below) 10.0 sec (Pre-heat mode: 16 sec. or below / Auto power-shut-off mode: 23 sec. or below) 15 15 15 15 15 15 12 12 12 15 15 15 99 1 4mm 4mm or less, 6mm or less (Duplex copying/both images) 4.0mm or less (per side), 4.5mm or less (Duplex copying/both images: per side) machine with side edge void 0.5mm 4mm (Total of both edge voids) Same size: 3.0mm or less / Enlarge (200%): 2.0mm or less / Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less Same size: 4.0mm or less / Enlarge (200%): 3.0mm or less / Reduction (50%): 8.0mm or less 0 sec. 0 sec. 0 sec.

OC mode Image loss SPF/R-SPF/ Duplex Warm-up time Power save mode reset time Paper jam recovery time

Leading edge Leading edge

2. Basic specifications of facsimile (AR-F152 only)

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Transmission time Transmission Method Compression method CommuniTransmission cation system method Modem speed Mutual transmission Line used Number of lines used ECM Max. document width Unscannable region Scanning system Document size Sub Item Spec. Approx. 6 sec. (G3 ECM/14,400bps) V17, V29, V27TER, V33 (Only Receiving) MH, MR, MMR 14,400bps 2,400bps automatic fall back G3 Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Private Branch exchange (PBX), 1 line (cannot be added) YES OC: B4 SPF: B4 (Multi)/ 257 500 (Single) Leading edge 1 to 4 mm, trailing edge: 4mm max., left end + right end: either 4mm max. SPF: Max. 10.1" 19.7" SPF: Min. 8.5" 5.5"(Inch System) SPF: 210 148mm (AB system) B4, 8-1/2, A4, B5, A5, 5/2 NO 2 3

Transmitted document size Document size designation Two-sided document designation

AR-F152 Large Item Scanning system Middle Item Document size Automatic document detection Scanning system Transmission mode Document loading capacity, scanning cycle (SPF performance) Small Item Long document SPF OC SPF/OC transmission changeover Continuous, automatic feed compatibility Document loading capacity Document scanning cycle Sub Item Spec. 500 mm (Single Feed with hand hold) YES (Over or Under B4 size) NO NO NO SPF: 30 sheets 13 sheets/min. (Standard mode, A4R memory transmission) Equivalent to 256 scales Following functions are not possible in half-Tone mode in B4 size. q Timer sending q Memory sending q Broadcast q To store the original for memory polling. Resolution Contrast adjustment Resolution selection Contrast selection Standard Fine Super fine Finest Printer section resolution Max. printing width Printing size Print paper size detection Printing size Print system Print paper Cassette capacity Print paper absence detection Exit Paper Tray Full sensor Feed Rapid key dialing Speed dialing Group dialing Transmission function system Easy dialing function 8 dot /mm 7.7 line / mm (Fixed) Manual in 3 stages (AE) 8 dot / mm 3.85 line / mm 8 dot / mm 7.7 line / mm 8 dot / mm 15.4 line / mm NO 600dpi 215.9 mm YES (Only width): A4/Letter or small size A4/Letter/Legal 250 2 (1 tray option for Europe) By failing paper pick up NO Paper cassette 20 other parties 100 other parties 20 groups (including the other parties registered to rapid key dialing) By using the SEARCH key: Any other parties registered to speed dialing and rapid key dialing can be searched for using the first letter. YES The last number dialed is saved NO NO Time of day specified for transmission or polling. Max.3

Half tone reproduction

Half tone (photo mode)

Image processing system

Phonebook transmission Chain dialing Redialing Program Mode recall

Time designation function

Time specified transmission/polling

2 4

AR-F152 Large Item Middle Item Small Item Automatic recall mode when other party is busy Sub Item Intervals Count Intervals Recall mode when communication error occurs Recall mode Number of transmissions counted in recall mode simultaneously Subsequent transmission reservation override in recall mode Memory Transmission Number of transmission Reservations that can be made Memory Transmission/direct transmission Memory transmission Processing when memory is full Count Transmitted Pages 1 to 15 minutes 1 to 14 times/0: no re-transmission 1 to 15 minutes 1 to 14 times/0: no re-transmission Beginning with the page where error occurred Spec.

Max. 20 transmissions

YES

YES

Max. 20

Transmission is cancelled when using Timer, Group or Broadcast function. Only scanned data is transmitted. The number of pages to be actually sent does not always correspond to the one passing through the SPF in case of communication error. The transmission is cancelled when communication error occurs. Setting change After Transmission Setting

Transmission function system Direct transmission Default setting Line sound monitoring function Dialing confirmation monitoring

NO

YES By Memory All Clear YES (Service Man diagnostic.) Number of destinations

50 destinations (Including the Group Dial) Broadcast key, group key Rapid or Speed keys Transmitted to group registered to rapid keys or speed dial.

Broadcast function

Broadcast transmission

Transmission method Usable numbers

Group dialing Instructing Station Relay station Multiple relay Boadcast function Relay transmission Number of relay groups Number of Receiving stations that may be Specified per Group Confidential function Batch transmission function Confidential transmission Other partys Station

NO NO NO NO

NO

NO

Batch transmission

NO

2 5

AR-F152 Large Item Middle Item Small Item Transmission reservation interrupt Broadcast interrupt Recall mode interrupt Multiple message transmission function Rotational Transmission Multiple message transmission Sub Item NO NO NO Spec.

Priority function

NO

Rotational transmission

Paper size Transmission method

NO YES (From OC mode)

Transmission function system

Book document transmission

Book document transmission

Consecutive page transmission (page splitting) OK stamp Remote Transmission Check by other Partys number

NO

OK stamp Remote transmission (Memory Polling)

NO YES (From Memory) NO

Remote transmission (polling transmission function)

Protective function

Check by Matching of System number (users own machine) and ID number (other partys Machine) (between Sharp machines only)

NO

Default setting

Automatic receiving (can be switched to A.M mode or manual receiving in key operator program) 0 to 9 times (factory-set to twice: can be changed in key operator program) - The external telephone rings once if set the number of calls for automatic receiving to 0 times. Automatic phone/fax switching NO

Number of calls Receiving mode Automatic receiving

Manual receiving Receiving function system Manual receiving

Manual receiving setting Number of Switching calls to automatic Receiving in manual receiving mode Answering Machine mode

YES

OFF/1 to 9 times

Receiving mode

YES

Telephone message receiver connection

Automatically switch to ON / OFF automatic receive Quiet detect time OFF/ 1 to 9 sec. NO

Receiving mode timer switching

2 6

AR-F152 Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Reduction made within Regular size By received data print size Designation Enlargement Substitute Receiving into Memory Forced memory receiving Received data override Output Transfer Number specified receiving Transfer at occurrence of trouble Receiving of only specified number enabled Anti junk fax mode Sender Confidential function Mailbox Confidential receiving Mailbox name Confidential ID code Rotational receiving Split size Split receiving Split receiving setting Two-sided document receiving 2-in-1 receiving Transmission request (polling receiving function) Turnaround transmission Number of other parties Speed dialing Number of other partys Number digits Registered name Registration system Number registration Searched letters User tag Classification Speed dialing International communication mode setting Transmission method Transmission Request Transmission request Resolution at transmission Request Spec. YES (ON/OFF in key operator program)

Variable scale factor receiving

Reduction

YES NO Only when data cannot be output

Memory Substitute receiving into receiving function memory

NO NO YES NO YES (ON/OFF) 10 group, 20 letters NO NO NO NO NO YES YES (according to paper selection condition in key operator program) NO NO YES

Receiving function system

Depends on the Sending Machine.

NO 100 other parties

20 digits 20 letters (may be omitted) Up to 1 letter NO

NO

Speed dialing key + (00 to 99) + start key

2 7

AR-F152 Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Number of other parties Number of other partys Number digits Registered name Rapid key dialing Searched letters User tag Classification International communication mode setting Transmission method Registration keys Max. number of registered other parties per group Group dialing Registrable Number Registered name Searched letters User tag Classification Transmission method Registration system Number of programs Program Registered name Calling method Setting change After calling Registration key Batch Number of other parties Registration method Sender Registration Sender registration Senders name Senders number Transmission request enable number Transmission Request source Number Registration System number Registration ID number Registration Key input Characters 20 other parties Spec.

20 digits 20 letters (may be omitted) Up to 1 letter NO

NO

Rapid key dialing Rapid keys 50 other parties Numbers registered to speed dialing and rapid key dialing. 20 letters (may be omitted) NO NO Group dialing NO

Number registration

Registerable item NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 24 letters, registered in key operator program 20 digits, registered in key operator program

Transmission request/remote transmission enable number registration

NO

System number ID number

NO NO YES Alphanumeric characters, symbols NO Registered in key operator program Support terms is from 1990 to 2089. NO

Letter input Registered data read-out, read-in Date & time adjustment Date indication change Backup

Input method Letters that may be input

Registered data backup at power failure

SRAM used, built-in battery-backed

2 8

AR-F152 Large Item Middle Item Handset On-hook Hold Pause Phone transmission at power failure Ringer volume Speaker volume Tone pulse switching External telephone connection Automatic telephone/fax switching Memory capacity Small Item Sub Item NO YES NO YES (2 second fixed) NO Adjusted in key operator program Adjusted by pressing arrow keys on the fax control panel Switched between 10 pps and TONE in key operator program (North America) YES Remote receiving switching YES (switching number in 1 digit +**) 0 to 9 NO Audio response Response voice recording Standard Option NO NO 2MB (Approx. 120 pages/A4) NO Yes Job memory back up: Approx. 1 hour (after min. 6 minutes charge) Configuration Memory back up to 5 years. LCD indication NO Spec.

Telephone Function System

Memory Back up Fax Memory Memory Contents (transmission reservation) confirmation Memory remain indication Page counter Date printing Date indication change Other partys name Additional information printing function for transmission Other partys number Senders name Senders number Transmission message Transmission message Sender printing function Additional printing function for receiving Regular message User message Senders number Senders name

Print out

YES

YES (Memory available percent display 3 digits in % on LCD NO YES (Year: month: day/ year in 4 digits) LCD: 2 digits / Print: 4 digits NO YES YES YES YES YES NO MESSAGE/URGENT/ IMPORTANT/CONFIDENTIAL/PLS.DISTRIBUTE/PLS. CALL BACK NO 20 digits 24 letters

Cover function

Cover item

Index printing

YES

2 9

AR-F152 Large Item Middle Item Small Item Communication record table size Communication record memory capacity Number of communications Time-specified output Communication record function Communication record table When recording Memory is full Printing sequence Department-bydepartment output Time-specified communication table Confidential receiving confirmation table Communication result table (transmission) Communication result report function Broadcast transmission report Communication result table (receiving) Document image printing when memory transmission is not yet made Rapid key dialing list Speed dialing list Group dialing list Transmission activity list ID/sender list Other report/list Batch transmission confirmation list Confidential ID list Option setting list Telephone list Timer list Anti junk fax number list Receptions activity List Memory image erasure list Other party confirmation function CSI function Others Department management Other party confirmation display CSI Department-by-department user restriction Number of set departments Department-by-department charge management function Operation panel display LCD Sub Item Spec. A4, LETTER, Legal (not output if size setting is not A4, LETTER, legal or larger) 50 communications for transmission/receiving respectively 50 communications for transmission/receiving respectively YES 5 kinds, Every day, Each 2 day, Each 4 day, Once a week, OFF The print time is fixed at 00:00. NO LAST IN LAST OUT

NO

Common to transmission record table NO YES (ALWAYS PRINT, ERROR/ TIMER, SEND ONLY, NEVER PRINT, ERROR ONLY) NO YES

Record table system

NO YES (output as telephone number list) YES (output as telephone number list) YES YES NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO NO NO 20 letters by 2 lines

2 10

AR-F152 Large Item Middle Item Auto startup mode Distinctive Ring (Only North America and Australia) Others Power consumption Automatic Summer Set (Only Europe) PBX setting (Only Europe) Energy star compatibility Small Item Sub Item NO Spec.

YES

YES

YES

YES

2 11

AR-F152

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply system table
A. SEC governments
No. 1 Name Toner CA(Black) with IC Content Toner (Toner :Net Weight 210g) Polyethylene bag 10 10 Life 65K Product name AR-152MT-J Package 1 Remark Life setup is based on A4 6%. MT=NT10

B. SEC/SECL/LAG
No. 1 Name Toner CA(Black) with IC Content Toner (Toner :Net Weight 210g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) Drum Drum fixing plate 10 10 10 250K 1 1 25K AR-152MD AR-152DR 1 10 Life 65K Product name AR-152MT Package 1 Remark Life setup is based on A4 6%. MT=NT10 MD=ND10

2 3

Developer Drum kit

Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 2 languages, English/French. Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN

C. Europe subsidiaries/East Europe/SCA/SCNZ

No. 1 Name Toner CA(Black) with IC Content Toner (Toner :Net Weight 210g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer :Net Weight 170g) Drum Drum fixing plate 10 10 10 250K 1 1 25K AR-152LD AR-152DM 1 10 LD=DV10 Life 65K Product name AR-152LT Package 1 Remark LT=T10

2 3

Developer Drum kit

Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 4 languages, English/French/German/Spanish. Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN

D. SMEF (Middle East, Africa) Israel/Russia/CIS/Taiwan/Philippines

No. 1 Name Toner CA(Black) with IC Content Toner (Toner :Net Weight 210g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer :Net Weight 170g) Drum Drum fixing plate 10 10 10 250K 1 1 25K AR-152CD AR-152DR 1 10 Life 65K Product name AR-152ET Package 1 Remark Life setup is based on A4 6%. ET=FT10 CD=SD10

2 3

Developer Drum kit

Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 4 languages, English/French/German/Spanish. Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN

E. Asia (Subsidiary)
No. 1 Name Toner CA(Black) with IC Content Toner (Toner :Net Weight 210g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer :Net Weight 170g) Drum Drum fixing plate 10 10 10 250K 1 1 25K AR-152CD AR-152DR 1 10 Life 65K Product name AR-152CT Package 1 Remark Life setup is based on A4 6%. CT=ST10 CD=SD10

2 3

Developer Drum kit

Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 4 languages, English/French/German/Spanish. Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN

3 1

AR-F152

F. SRH/SOCC Chinese language version

No. 1 Name Toner CA(Black) with IC Content Toner (Toner :Net Weight 210g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer :Net Weight 170g) Drum Drum fixing plate 10 10 10 250K 1 1 25K AR-152CD-C AR-152DR-C 1 10 Life 65K Product name AR-152CT-C Package 1 Remark Life setup is based on A4 6%. CTC=STC10 CDC=SDC10

2 3

Developer Drum kit

Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 2 languages, English/Chinese. Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN

2. Environmental
The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the machine operations are as follows:

3. Production control number(lot No.) identification

Developing cartridge

(1) Normal operating condition

Temperature:20C~25 Humidity:65 5%RH

Production month Production day Destination code

(2) Acceptable operating condition

Humidity (RH) 85% 60%

(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) Production place (SOCC: Fixed to B.) End digit of year Version No.

:Destination Division No. A same pack B same pack G H P Q

20%

EX Destination

10C

30C

35C

Option Destination

A B

(3) Optical condition

Humidity (RH) 90% 60%

Drum cartridge
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production. (SOCC production)

Production month Production day Destination code (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)

15%

Production place (SOCC: Fixed to B.) End digit of year

25C

30C

40C

Version No.

(4) Supply storage condition

Humidity (RH) 90%

JAPAN production
Ver.A 9 1 1 0001 X Production month (1 - 9 = Jan. - Sep. 0 = Oct. X = Nov. Y = Dec.) Serial number of month Fixed to 1. Pack division (See table below)

20%

End digit of year Version No.

5C

45C
3 2

AR-F152 Division Ex production Option Same pack No. 1 2 3

4. TD cartridge replacement
1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier. 2) Keep holding Toner lover, and 3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier.

3
Production control label attachment position

4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it from the copier

Production control label attachment position(*1)

1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a China product.

Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the collection bag.

3 3

AR-F152

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. Appearance
3 4

14 15
5

16 17

2 7

AR-F152 only

19
6

AR-156 only 20 18

8 9 10

21

22 24 23

13

19

12

11

1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22

Operation panel Original guides 1 Original cover Bypass tray guides Paper tray Original guides 2 Handle Paper output tray extension

2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23

Original table Document feeder tray 1 Side cover Side cover open button R-SPF exit area 2 Document feeder tray 2 Cover for optional printer interface Power switch 2 AR-156 only

3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24

SPF exit area 1 FAX operation panel 1 Bypass tray Front cover Middle tray 2 Feeding roller cover 2 Paper output tray Power cord socket

A GDI expansion kit is optional.

1 AR-F152 only

2. Internal
1

2 3 4

1 4

Toner cartridge lock release lever Transfer charger

2 5

Toner cartridge Charger cleaner

3 6

Photoconductive drum Fusing unit release lever

4 1

AR-F152

3. Operation panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

20

14

15

16

17

18

19

Exposure mode selector key and indicators Use to sequentially select the exposure modes: AUTO, MANUAL or PHOTO. Selected mode is shown by a lit indicator. Alarm indicators :Developer replacement required indicator :Misfeed indicator :TD cartridge replacement required indicator :Maintenance indicator SPF misfeed indicator (AR-156, AR-F152 only) Zoom indicator Display Displays the specified copy quantity, zoom copy ratio, user program code, and error code. ON LINE KEY Changes between the on-line and off-line modes when the PCL expansion kit has been installed and a PCL printer is used. Changes modes from the off-line to on-line when the GDI expansion kit has been installed and a GDI printer is used. (AR-151, AR-156 only) Power save indicator Lights up when the copier is in a power save mode. Paper feed location indicators Light up to show the selected paper feed station.

Light and dark keys and exposure indicators Use to adjust the MANUAL or PHOTO exposure level. Selected exposure level is shown by a lit indicator. Use to start and terminate user program setting.

SPF indicator (AR-156, AR-F152 only)

Copy ratio selector key and copy ratio indicators Use to sequentially select preset reduction/enlargement copy ratios. Selected copy ratio is shown by a lit indicator. Copy ratio display (%) key ON LINE indicator / ON LINE KEY Lights up when the machine is used as a printer. To use as a printer, an optional printer expansion kit is needed. (AR-151, AR-156 only)

10

11

12

DATA indicator Indicates that the printer is receiving or processing print data. To use the copier as a printer, an optional PCL expansion kit is needed. (AR-151, AR-156 only)

13

14

Tray select key Use to select a paper feed station (paper tray or bypass tray). Zoom keys Use to select any reduction or enlargement copy ratio from 50% to 200% in 1% increments. Clear key Press to clear the display, or press during a copy run to terminate copying. Press and hold down during standby to display the total number of copies made to date. Duplex Mode select key and indicator (AR-156 only)

15

16

17

Copy quantity keys Use to select the desired copy quantity (1 to 99). Use to make user program entries. Print key and ready indicator Copying is possible when the indicator is on. Use to set a user program.

18

19

20

4 2

AR-F152

4. Operation Panel (AR-F152 only)

2

22 21

3 20
ENTER

4 5 6

BOOK SEND

FUNCTION

AUTO MANUAL A.M.

19

RESOLUTION CONTRAST BROADCAST

RECEPTION MODE

01

02

03

04

05

18 17 16

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

7
16 17 18 19 20/POLL

ABC

DEF

DOCUMENT

15

GHI

JKL

MNO

SPEED/ SEARCH

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

REDIAL/ PAUSE

14 13 12

8
STOP

SPEAKER

FAX START

10

11

11

Left arrow key ( ) and right arrow key ( ) Press these keys to scroll through a menu. During input mode, these keys are also sometimes used to move the cursor. Liquid crystal display Shows various messages during fax operation and programming. RESOLUTION key Press this key to adjust the resolution before sending faxes. Rapid keys Press one of these keys to dial a fax or telephone number automatically. Press Rapid key 20 to start polling. (Note that you must attach the Rapid key labels.) / # Press these keys to enter symbols during the name storing procedure. Press the key to change from pulse dialing to tone dialing mode. FAX START key Press this key to begin sending a fax or manually receiving a fax. REDIAL/PAUSE key Press this key to automatically redial the last number you dialed. Also, press this key to insert a pause when entering numbers. DOCUMENT key Press this key to perform a direct send fax transmission. RECEPTION MODE key Press this key to select the mode of reception. MANUAL light This light indicates that the machine must be answered manually. ENTER key Press this key to decide an item in a menu, or to enter numbers and letters you have typed in.

FUNCTION key Press this key to enter function mode. BOOK SEND key Press this key to fax a document from the original table. CONTRAST key Press this key to adjust the contrast before sending faxes. Number keys Press these keys to dial numbers, and enter numbers and letters during number/name storing procedures. STOP key Press this key to stop an operation before it is completed, or to delete the number that was last input. This key is also used to close the line when manually dialing. SPEAKER key Press this key to begin manual dialing. (To close the line, press the SPEAKER key again.) SPEED/SEARCH key Press this key to dial a two digit Speed Dial number. During character inputting, use this key to delete an incorrect entry. Also, press this key twice to search for an automatic dialing number. BROADCAST key Press this key to send documents to a group of receiving fax machines. A.M. light This light indicates the answering machine will answer the line if properly connected. AUTO light This light indicates that the machine will answer the machine automatically. LCD contrast dial Turn this dial to adjust the contrast level of the LCD.

10

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

4 3

AR-F152

5. Motors and solenoids

11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Toner motor Mirror motor SPF motor

Part name TM

Control signal Supplies toner.

Function operation

MRMT SPMT SPUS VFM MM RRS MPFS CPFS1 CPFS2 DMT

Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit). Drives the single pass feeder Original feed solenoid Cools the optical section. Drives the copier. Resist roller rotation control solenoid Multi manual pages feed solenoid Cassette paper feed solenoid 1 Cassette paper feed solenoid 2 Drivers the duplex paper transport section

Original feed solenoid Cooling fan motor Main motor Resist roller solenoid Multi paper feed solenoid Paper feed solenoid Paper feed solenoid Duplex Motor

4 4

AR-F152

6. Sensors and switches

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

15
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name Mirror home position sensor SDOD sensor POD sensor SPF sensor SPPD sensor PPD2 sensor Cassette detection switch Cassette detection switch Paper size detection switch Paper size detection swtich 2 PPD1 sensor PPD3 sensor Door switch Door switch Drum reset switch Signal MHPS SDOD POD SPID/ SDSW SPPD PPD2 CED1 CED2 PSW1 PSW2 PPD1 PPD3 DSW DSW DRST

14

13

12 11

10

Type Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Microswitch Microswitch Microswitch Microswitch Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Micro switch Micro switch Micro switch

Function Mirror (scanner unit) home position detection SPF open/close detection Book sensor Paper exit detection Paper entry detection Cover open/close detection Paper transport detection Paper transport detection 2 Cassette installation detection Cassette installation detection Detects A4/Letter or smaller sizes Detects A4/Letter or smaller sizes Paper transport detection 1 Paper transport detection 3 Door open/close detection (safety switch for 5V) Door open/close detection (safety switch for 24V) New drum detection switch

Output H at home position L at paper pass H at paper pass L at paper pass L at paper pass L at paper pass H at cassette insertion

1 or 0V of 5V at door open

L at paper pass L at paper pass 1 or 0V of 5V at door open 1 or 0V of 24V at door open Instantaneously H at insertion of new drum

4 5

AR-F152

7. PWB unit

2 1 3 4 5 6

7 12 8

11

10

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Name Exposure lamp invertor PWB GDI/USB PWB Main PWB (MCU) FAX control PWB Memory PWB 6MB FAX operation PWB LSU PWB LSU motor PWB TCS PWB Operation PWB CCD sensor PWB Power PWB

Function Exposure lamp (Xenon lamp) control For GDI/USB interface Copier control For FAX control For memorizing data Operation input/LCD display For laser control For polygon motor drive For toner sensor control Operation input/display For image scanning AC power input, DC voltage control, High voltage control

4 6

AR-F152

8. Cross sectional view

3 4 1 2

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

19
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part name Paper exit roller Lens unit LSU (Laser unit) Main charger Paper exit roller Pickup roller Separation roller PS roller Scanner unit Exposure lamp Heat roller Pressure roller Drum Transfer unit Pickup roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper feed roller PS roller unit Paper feed roller Roller for paper exit

18

17

(AR-F152)

Function and operation

Scans the original image with the lens and the CCD. Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum. Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface. Discharges documents. Picks up documents. Separates documents to feed properly. Feeds documents to the scanning section. Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD). Exposure lamp (Xenon lamp) Illuminates original Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller) Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller) Forms images. Transfers images onto the drum. Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only) Tray for manual feed paper Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port. Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper. Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.

4 7

AR-F152

[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

1. COPIER INSTALLATION
Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved. Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place, condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions. Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours before use. Do not install your copier in areas that are: q damp, humid, or very dusty
4" (10cm)

8"(20cm)

8"(20cm)

4" (10cm)

2. CAUTIONS ON HANDLING
Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the performance of this copier. Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any object.

q exposed to direct sunlight

Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight. Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge, causing poor print quality.

q poorly ventilated Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and TD cartridges in a dark place without removing from the package before use. If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result. q subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater. Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge. Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor print quality.

The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection. Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation.

5 1

AR-F152

3. CHECKING PACKED COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

Open the carton and check if the following components and accessories are included.
Power cord

6. Developer unit INSTALLATION

1) 2) 3) Open the side and front cabinets of the copier. 4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit. 5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer unit. 6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier.

Line cord FAX model only

5 3

Copier

Drum cartridge (installed in copier)

4. UNPACKING
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the copier to unpack the copier and carry it to the installation location.

7) Remove the screw (1 pc). 8) Remove Upper developer unit.

5. REMOVING PROTECTIVE PACKING MATERIALS

1) Remove pieces of tape and protective cover. Then open the original cover and remove protective materials (a) and (b).

9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer 10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX roller evenly.

2) Use a coin (or suitable object) to remove the screw. Store the screw in the paper tray because it will be used if the copier has to be moved.

Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer unit. 11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw.

5 2

AR-F152

12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly.

4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier. 5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in the figure below.

Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction. Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as shown with the arrow in the figure below. (Prevention of splash of developer) 6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction.

13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier. Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be sure to insert carefully. 14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a screw. 15) Completion of Developer unit installation

Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter may drop and Toner unit may drop. 7) Completion of Toner unit installation Close the front and side cabinets.

8. LOADING COPY PAPER

Note: This copier is equipped with two paper trays. Load copy paper into the two paper trays. 1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops.

7. TONER CARTRIDGE INSTALLATION

1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit with both hands and shake it several times horizontally.

2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below, remove the packing tape, and remove the cushion. 3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction.

2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down the pressure plate of the paper tray.

5 3

AR-F152

3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step 2 and the screw which has been removed when unpacking (see page 4-2, step 2 of REMOVING PROTECTIVE PACKING MATERIALS) in the front of the paper tray. To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to fix it on the relevant location. 4) Adjust the paper guides on the paper tray to the copy paper width and length. Squeeze the lever of paper guide (A) and slide the guide to match with the width of the paper. Move paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray.

TE

E LIN

Paper guide (B)

Paper guide (A)

10. Connecting Other Devices

If desired, an answering machine or external telephone can be connected to the unit through the telephone jack, labeled TEL, on the rear of the unit. q Connecting an answering machine to the unit allows you to receive both voice and fax messages when you are out. To use this feature, first change the outgoing message of your answering machine, and then set the reception mode of the unit to A.M. (Answering Machine mode) when you go out. Note: If you are using distinctive ringing with an answering machine, you do not need to follow the procedure described below. (Please note that when distinctive ringing is used, the answering machine must be connected to a separate wall jack, not to your fax.)

5) Fan the copy paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure the edges go under the corner hooks. Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( ). Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.

6) Gently push the paper tray back into the copier. Note: After loading copy paper, to cancel the blinking P without restarting copying, press the clear ( ) key. The P in the display will go out and the ready ( ) indicator will light up.

The outgoing message of your answering machine should be changed to inform callers who want to send a fax to press their FAX START key. Comments: 1) It is advisable to keep the length of the message under 10 seconds. If it is too long, you may have difficulty receiving faxes sent by automatic dialing. 2) Your callers can even leave a voice message and send a fax message on the same call. Modify your outgoing message to explain that this can be done by pressing their FAX START key after leaving their voice message. q You can connect an extension phone to the unit to make and receive calls like any other extension phone on your line. Even if you pick up the extension phone and hear a fax tone, the unit will automatically cut in and take over the line. Note, however, that if you also have a PC modem on the same line, you must turn on the Remote Reception function, and deactivate the Fax Signal Receive function. See Setting Up the Unit for Use with a PC Modem and Using the Remote Reception Function in Chapter 2). Note: The Remote Reception function is initially set to ON.

9. Connecting the Telephone Line Cord

Plug one end of the telephone line cord into the jack on the unit marked LINE .Plug the other side into a standard (RJ11C) single-line telephone wall jack. Be sure not to plug this line cord into the TEL jack. The TEL jack is used to attach an extension telephone or answering machine to the unit. (See Connecting Other Devices in this chapter for details.) Note: If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for the power and telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or at most telephone specialty stores. 5 4

11. POWER TO COPIER

1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF position. Insert the attached power cord into the power cord socket at the rear of the copier. 2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.

AR-F152

[6] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration. (Basic configuration)

Scanner section

Operation section

CCD

MCU (Main control/image process section)

LSU (Laser unit) Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens Laser beam

Paper exit Fusing section

Process section Printer section

Paper transport section

Cassette paper feed section

Manual paper feed section

(Outline of copy operation) Setting conditions 1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU. Image scanning 2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts scanning of images. The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and passed through the lens to the CCD. Photo signal/Electric signal conversion 3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU. Image process 4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) as print data. Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion 5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data. (Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.) 6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and various lenses to the OPC drum. Printing 7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible images (toner images). 8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in synchronization with the image lead edge. 9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged onto the exit tray.

6 1

AR-F152

2. Scanner section
A. How to scan documents
The scanner has sensors that are arranged in a line. These sensors scan a certain area of a document at a time and deliver outputs sequentially. When the line is finished, the next line is scanned, and this procedure is repeated. The figure below shows the case where the latter two sections of an image which are scanned are shown with solid lines and the former two sections which are being transmitted are shown with dotted lines. The direction of this line is called main scanning direction, and the scanning direction sub scanning direction. In the figure above, one line is divided into 4 sections. Actually, however, one line is divided into thousands of sections. For scanning, the light receiving element called CCD is used. The basic resolution indicates the scanner capacity. The basic resolution is expressed in dpi (dot/inch) which shows the number of light emitting elements per inch on the document. The basic resolution of this machine is 400dpi. In the sub scanning direction, at the same time, the motor that drives the optical system is controlled to scan the image at the basic resolution.
Main scanning direction

Sub scanning direction Sensor scanning area

Original

1 2 3

4
5

Image data sent to the ICU PWB

5 4 3 2 1

To MCU PWB

B. Basic structure of scanner section

(11)

(4)

(1)

(2)

(8)

(5)
1 4 7 10 Copy lamp (Xenon lamp) No. 2 mirror No. 2/3 mirror unit Mirror motor

(7)
2 5 8 11

(3)

(6)

(9) (10)
3 6 9 No. 1 mirror Lens CCD

Reflector (light conversion plate) No. 3 mirror Copy lamp unit MHPS (Mirror home position sensor)

The scanner unit performs scanning in the digital optical system. The light from the light source (Xenon lamp) is reflected by a document and passed through three mirrors and reduction lenses to the CCD element (image sensor) where images are formed. This system is known as the reduction image sensor system. Photo energy on the CCD element is converted into electrical signals (analog signals). (Photo-electric conversion). The output signals (analog signals) are converted into digital signals (A/D conversion) and passed to the MCU (main control/image process section). The resolution at that time is 400dpi. The mirror unit in the scanner section is driven by the mirror motor. The MHPS is provided to detect the home position of the copy lamp unit.

3. Laser unit
The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.
(3) (2) (1)

A. Basic structure
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system. The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and f lens, etc. The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical lens, the polygon mirror, the f lens, and the mirror to form images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BF PWB works for measurement of the laser writing start point.

(4)

: Laser beam path for BF PWB

(5)

6 2

AR-F152 No. (1) (2) (3) (4) Component Semiconductor laser Collimator lens Polygon mirror, polygon motor BD (Mirror, lens, PWB) Function Generates laser beams. Converges laser beams in parallel. Reflects laser beams at a constant rpm. Detects start timing of laser scanning. Converges laser beams at a spot on the drum. (5) f lens Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. (Refer to the figure below.)

4. Fuser section

Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other.

abc
a b c

d=e=f
d e f

A. General description
General block diagram (cross section)

Thermal fuse

Separator pawl PPD2

f LENS

B. Laser beam path

Thermistor Pressure roller Heat roller

Paper guide
Top view
Thermal fuse Heater lamp

Heat roller

Thermistor

C. Composition
Effective scanning width: Resolution: Beam diameter: 216mm (max.) 600dpi 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the sub scanning direction 0.20 0.03mW (Laser wavelength 780 795nm) Brushless motor 20.787rpm No. of mirror surfaces: 6 surfaces

Separator pawl

(1) Heat roller A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance and paper separation. (2) Separator pawl Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator pawls are teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.

Image surface power: Polygon motor section:

6 3

AR-F152 (3) Thermal control 1. The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control the temperature in the fuser unit. To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes. 2. The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 165C 190C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is set to 100C. 3. The self-check function comes active when one of the following malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy window. a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240C. b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100C during the copy cycle. c. Open thermistor d. Open thermal fuse e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190C within 27 second after supplying the power. (4) Fusing resistor Fusing resistor This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to improve transfer efficiency. General descriptions are made in the following. General descriptions Since the upper heat roller is conductive when copy paper is highly moist and the distance between the transfer unit and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current leaks through the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush.

Heated by the heater lamp.(950W)

Saftey device (Thermal breaker, thermal fuse)

The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is sensed by the thermistor.

Triac (in the power supply unit)

Level of the thermistor is controlled by the main PWB.

With th e signal f rom the main PWB, the triac is controlled on and o ff. (power supply PWB )

5. Paper feed section and paper transport section

A. Paper transport path and general operations
(2) (5) (3) (4) (6)

(1)

(7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

(15)

(14) (13)

(12)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Scanner unit Copy lamp Lens unit LSU (Laser unit) Paper exit roller

(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

Main charger Heat roller Pressure roller Drum Transfer unit

(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

Pickup roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper feed roller PS roller unit Paper feed roller

Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250 sheets. The front loading system allow you to install or remove the tray from the front cabinet. The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed are given below.

6 4

AR-F152 (1) Cassette paper feed operation 1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready lamp. The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve. 5) At this time, the paper is fed past the paper entry detection switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing against skew feeding.

2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts rotating to drive each drive gear. The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-up roller, which does not rotate.

PFS ON

RRS OFF

PFS OFF

RRS OFF
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve projection, transmitting rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the paper is transported by the resist roller. 7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by the drum curve and the separation section.

3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on momentarily. This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper.

PFS OFF

RRS OFF

PFS OFF

RRS ON

4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed latch is brought in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve, stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.

8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out detector) to the copy tray.

6 5

AR-F152 (2) Manual multi paper feed operation 1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.

A C

A
ON MPFS

OFF MPFS
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed latch A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding.

4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarily to make synchronization with the lead edge of the image on the OPC drum. The operations hereinafter are the same as the paper feed operations from the tray. (Refer to A-5 8.) 5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial state.

C A

A C

ON MPFS
3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is hung on the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is rotating.

OFF MPFS
(3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed a. When the power is turned on: PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on. b. Copy operation 1) PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec a. PPD1 jam b. PPD2 jam

after turning on the resist roller. 1) PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the resist roller. 2) PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after turning off the resist roller.

6 6

AR-F152 c. POD jam

1) POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning on the resist roller. 2) POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec 2.7 sec after turning off PPD2.

6. Process unit new drum detection mechanism

1) When the power is turned on, the detection gear 38T is rotated in the arrow direction by the detection gear 20T to push the microswitch (process detection switch) installed to the machine sensor cover, making a judgement as a new drum. 2) When the any more The latch projection detection gear 38T turns one rotation, there is no gear and it stops. section of the 38T gear is latched and fixed with the of the process cover.

Gear notch

Gear 20T

Gear 38T

Gear pawl Projection Gear notch

Process detection switch

Projection Gear pawl

7. FAX-SPF section (AR-F152 only)

A. Outline
The SPF (Single Path Feeder) is installed to the AR-F152 as a standard provision, and it automatically copies up to 30 sheets of documents of a same size. (Only one set of copies)

B. Document transport path and basic composition

(1) (4) (7) (10)

Pickup roller Paper stopper Paper entry sensor Paper exit roller

(2) (5) (8) (11)

Sheet of document for paper feed Document feed roller PS roller D Paper exit follower roller

(3) (6) (9) (12)

Set detection ACT Separation sheet Transport follower roller Document tray

6 7

AR-F152

C. Operational descriptions
Time chart (Tray feed) Document set

SPID ON

Document set sensor

Document feed unit lamp ON Copy start The scanner is shifted to the exposure position. (SPF side)

PSW ON

MIRM rotation (Copier side)

MM rotation

Main motor rotation Paper feed

SPFM rotation

SPF motor rotation

CPFS ON

SPUS ON PPD ON

Document feed

RRC ON (Transfer)

Synchronization Paper transport

SPPD ON (Exposure)

Document transport sensor Document transport

(Fusing)

(Document exit)

POD ON

(Paper exit) In the zooming mode, the magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction (paper transport direction) is adjusted by changing the document transport speed.

D. Cases where a document jam is caused

a. b. c. d. When When When When SPPD is ON (document remaining) when the power is turned on. SPPD is not turned ON within about 1.5 sec (at 100% copy) after starting the document feed operation. SPPD is not turned on within about 4.7 sec (at 100% copy) after turning on SPPD. the SPF document jam release door or the OC cover is opened during document transport (SPF motor rotating).

6 8

AR-F152

8. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport (AR-156 only)

A. Initial state
Set duplex documents on the document tray. Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed tray cannot be selected.) Paper transport:

B. Front copy
Document transport: The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed roller to the PS roller. The document is exposed in the exposure section, and sent to the document exit section by the transport/paper exit roller. R-SPF gate solenoid ON The document is sent to the intermediate tray (but not discharged completely.) The document is stopped once, then switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy) Paper transport: The document is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller by the paper feed roller and the images on the front surface are transferred. The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side, (but not discharged completely.) It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy)
Gate OFF

R-SPF gate solenoid OFF The document is discharged to the document exit tray. Switchback operation is performed. The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and the duplex transport section, and the PS roller, and the images on the back are transferred. It is sent through the fusing section and discharged to the paper exit tray.
Gate ON

Upper Side of Gate

Gate ON

Lower Side of Gate

Gate OFF

Gate ON

C. Back copy
Document transport: By switchback operation, the document is sent through the PS roller to the exposure section, where the back of the document is exposed. It is sent to the document exit section by the transport roller and the paper exit roller. R-SPF gate solenoid ON. The document is sent to the intermediate tray, (but not discharged completely.) It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed. It is sent through the PS roller and the exposure section (without exposure operation) to the document exit section.

Switchback operation is made after back copying in order to discharge documents according to the setting. Set document Documents after discharge, 1 4 3 with empty feed without empty feed 2 3 4 3 2 1 4 1 2 There are following job modes as well as D-D mode. S - S (Simplex to Simplex) S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Rotation copy mode (The back images are rotated 180.) S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Copy mode without rotation D - S (Duplex to Simplex) Rotation copy mode:

The front and the back are upside down to each other.
Copy mode without rotation:

The front and the back are not upside down. 6 9

AR-F152

9. FAX-OPERATION FLOWCHART (AR-F152 only)

FLOW-VE1 Start WT Cl signal received? Button pressed? Yes RX CML ON No

START key pressed?

No

Auto dial Yes AU

No

Yes No
Documents exist?

Yes No No

OFF HOOK? Yes CML ON

OFF HOOK? Yes CML ON

RX

TX

Send DCN TD DL

Line out routine ER CML signal OFF Beep alam

Send DCN DR CML signal OFF END beep

WT TD1

Communicatinon error flag ON

TD

6 10

AR-F152
FLOW-VE-2 TX

Tum on TEL LED TX3 Command received? YES

DIS or DTC

NO NO
YES

T1 elapsed?

NO

YES ER ER

TX1
TX2

YES Polling mode?

RX1

NO
Set mode

Insert document Send DCS

Make 75msec delay

Send traning

Send TCF TD
YES 3 retrys? NO
Response received?

YES
YES

YES DIS? NO
DTC?

TX1

NO

3 retrys?

YES

YES
YES

NO FTT?
NO

Fall back possible? NO TX6

CFR? YES Document on? YES Send traning?

NO
NO

TD TD

TD1

Send image information Send RTC

75msec delay

NO Last document YES

NO Mode change? Send MPS NO
Response received?

YES

Send EOM

Send EOP NO NO 3 times? YES

NO 3 times?
YES

NO YES

3 times? YES

NO
Response received?

Response received?

YES
TD1

YES PIN or PIP NO MCF NO YES RTP NO

TX2 YES TX7 RTN RTP

YES

TD1 YES YES

YES

PIN or PIP NO MCF NO RTP

NO

PIN or PIP
NO YES

TD1

TX6

YES

MCF YES
YES

RTN NO Tx3

TD

RTN NO

NO DL

TD

6 11

AR-F152
FLOW-VE-3 RX

2sec delay Send CED 75ms delay

YES Send (NSC) DTC? RX1

Polling mode Send (NSF) DIS

Response received?
NO

Answer procedure Send (NSF) (CSI)-DIS 2times

NO T1 elapsed? YES

TX2

YES

DTC
NO

ER
YES

DIS
NO

TX1

NO
NO

DCS
YES

Enough Memory?
YES

Send DCN CML OFF 3 sec msx.

Set mode on this side

Receive training TCF TCF good?

YES NO

Beep STOP YES

Send CFR Set T2

Command received? NO

Send FTT
RX2

Message carrier received? RX1

YES EOM NO

YES

NO

T2 elapsed?
NO

Receive message RTC received?

Set communication error flag

YES
PR1-Q NO

YES

Message in received?

ER

TL2 RX3

MPS NO EOP NO EOM NO

ER

YES
YES

YES

Memory Full?
NO NO
Image quality good?

YES

TD

YES Line good?

Send RTN

Send RTP

Send MCF

RX2

6 12

AR-F152

FLOW-VE-4
Response received?

NO

NO T4 elapsed?

1 NO Flag? YES Flag received? YES YES FCS error? NO CRP? NO NO YES RCN NO YES Option response? NO DR

NO NO

Signal end? YES 200ms elapsed?

NO YES

NO 3sec elapsed? YES

NO 3sec elapsed? YES NO Signal end? YES 200ms elapsed? YES ER 1 Retum "NO"

YES

TD 1

Process against option response

Retum "YES" 2

Command received?

NO

Flag? YES Reset T2

YES

NO 3sec elapsed?

NO

Signal end?

NO

Frame received? YES FCS error? NO

YES 200ms elapsed? DR NO YES

YES

DCN NO

Signal end? YES 200ms elapsed? YES CRP? NO

NO

NO 3sec elapsed? YES

NO

YES

ER

Option response? YES Process against option response

Response CRP

Retum "YES" Retum "NO"

6 13

AR-F152

Auto dial sending

Enter

Relay ON

Pause 2sec

Dial Tone? YES

NO YES OVER 3sec? YES NO Busy or Reorder Tone? NO YES

Recall

Recall

Send CNG

Preambles Pulse or tone Tone

Signal send by MODEM

YES

Pulse
Pulse send by relay

CED?

YES

NO

Registration TEL end

NO 45sec

Recall

Phase B

6 14

AR-F152

[7] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for safety. The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the following sections: 1. High voltage section 2. Operation panel section 3. Optical section 4. Fusing section 5. Tray paper feed/transport section 6. Manual paper feed section 7. Rear frame section 8. Power section 9. SPF section 10. 2nd cassette section 11. DUP motor section 12. Reverse roller section 13. RSPF section 14. FAX MCU PWB section 15. FAX-SPF section

2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. (Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.

LO C K

(2)

1. High voltage section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 Drum Transfer charger unit Charger wire 3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage. If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5) and later. If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12). 4) Remove the main charger. (Cleaning the screen grid and the sawteeth.) Part name Ref.

(3)

B. Drum replacement
1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)

7 1

AR-F152 5) Remove the cleaning blade. Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed. Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade. Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket on the sub blade. Do not press the sub blade with the mocket. 10) Attach the main charger. Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process frame. Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove in the process frame. When attaching the MC holder assy, be careful not to make contact with the cleaning blade.

6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner. 7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely. Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade. 8) Attach the cleaning blade. Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the unit and fix it with a screw. Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand. When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in the arrow direction and attach.

11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2)

9) Attach the felt.

Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade edge breakage) Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as shown.

7 2

AR-F152 12) Attach the detection gear. Note: The detection gear is not installed to the drum cartridge packed with the main body. Add a new one. (2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and remove the transfer charger.
Lock pawl rear

1)

13) Attach the drum cover. Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy. When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum cover to the process frame.

C. Disassembly procedure
(1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover.

2)

Transfer charger

1)

Lock pawl front

D. Assembly procedure
1) 2)
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

E. Charger wire cleaning

(1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.

1)

7 3

AR-F152 (2) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocally a few times in the arrow direction shown in the figure below.

2. Operation panel section

A. List
No. Part name Ref. Operation panel unit Operation PWB

3)

4)

1 2

2) 1)

B. Disassembly procedure
(1) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panel unit.

1) 1) 2) 3) 1)

F. Charger wire replacement

(1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw. (2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire. (3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2). At that time, be careful of the following items. q The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. q The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be in the range of the projection section. q Be careful not to twist the charger wire.

(2) Remove the screws (3 pcs.) and the PWB holder. (3) Remove the screws (3 pcs.) and the operation PWB.

1)
3)

1)

Charger wire

1)

3)
2)

3)

2)

3)

1mm
Protrusion

4)

1.5mm
Note that there are 13 pawls

7 4

AR-F152

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure

(2) Remove the screws (2pcs.), and remove the copy lamp unit from the mirror base drive wire.

3. Optical section
A. List
NO. 1 2 3 Copy lamp unit Copy lamp Lens unit Part name Ref.

2)

B. Disassembly procedure
(1) Remove the parts as shown below.

3) 1)

1)

2) 3)

1)

2)
4)

9)

7)
4)

Hook
(3) Pull the copy lamp unit toward you to remove the harness.

10) 6) 4) 3)

5)

2)

8)

3) 1)

1)

2) 3)

(4) Remove the screw (4 pc) and remove the cover.

7 5

AR-F152 (5) Remove the screws (2 pcs.), the harness, and the optical unit.
1)

4. Fusing section
A. List
No. 1 Thermistor PPD2 sensor Heater lamp Pressure roller Heat roller Part name Ref.

4) 3)

2 3
5)

2)

4 5

B. Disassembly procedure
(1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet. (2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing unit.

When installing the lens unit, refer to 8-6. Lens unit installation reference.

C. Assembly procedure
Basically reverse the disassembly procedure. The mirror base drive wire and the lens drive wire stretching methods are described below. a. Mirror base drive wire stretching 1. Hook the metal fixture of the mirror base drive wire on the projection of the optical base plate. 2. Pass the wire through the external groove of the double pulley. (At that time, check that No. 2/3 mirror unit is in contact with the mirror base positioning plate.) 3. Hold so that the winding pulley groove is up, and wind the mirror base drive wire 9 turns. 4. Put the 8th turn of the mirror base drive wire in the winding pulley groove and fix with a screw. 5. Pass the wire under No. 2/3 mirror unit plate and wind it around pulley A. 6. Pass the wire through the internal groove of the double pulley, and pass through pulley B. 7. Hook the spring hook on the optical base plate.
6 2 5 7

1)

3)

2)

2)
Wind closely

(3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermistor.
6 2

1)
3 6

6 6 5 2 6 1 3 1

Wind closely

2)

4 2

After installing the mirror base drive wire, be sure to perform main scanning direction image distortion adjustment.

Thermistor

3)

7 6

AR-F152 (4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide. (7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp.

1)

2)

1)

2)

Pressure roller section disassembly

(5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the right side, and open the heat roller section.

Hearter lamp

2) 3) 4)
(8) Remove the spring and remove the separation pawls (3 pcs.).

6)
3)

5)

1)
2)

5)

6)

(6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.

1)

1)

(9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.

2)
PPD2 sensor

3)

1) 2)

7 7

AR-F152 (10) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left sides. (6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat roller.

1)

1)

2)

3)

Heat roller

1)

(7) Remove the parts from the heat roller. Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with V. (11) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring. Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with V.

V Pressure roller 1) 3) 2) 1) 2)
(8) Remove two screws and remove the thermostat.

3) 2) 1)

3)

1)

Heat roller disassembly (Continued from procedure (4).)

(5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat roller section.

3)

2)

2)

1)

3)
3)

2)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

7 8

AR-F152

5. Tray paper feed/transport section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 PPD1 sensor PWB LSU unit Intermediate frame unit Paper feed roller Part name Ref.

(3) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.

2)

B. Disassembly procedure
(1) Remove six connectors and screws of the main PWB, and lift the optical unit and the main PWB to remove.

2)

2)
1)

2)

(4) Remove two springs and open the intermediate frame unit.

2)

1)
3) 1)

1)

2)

(2) Remove the PWB insulation mylar and remove the paper transport detection sensor (PPD2).

2)

1)

3)

7 9

AR-F152 (5) Remove the pulleys on the both sides and remove the paper exit roller. (7) Release the belt pulley lock and remove the belt pulley bearing.

3)

2)

3) 1)

4)

2)
1)

(8) Remove the paper exit roller.

(6) Pull out the paper exit roller knob and remove the belt.

2)

1)

7 10

AR-F152 (9) Remove the harness guide. (11) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.

3)

4) 2)

1)

(10) Remove five screws and remove the main drive plate and the belt.

1) 4) 2) 3)

2)

1)

(12) Remove six screws and remove the LSU unit.

2)

1)

3)

1)

1)

CAUTION:Attach the gears securely

7 11

AR-F152 (13) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector. (14) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate frame unit to remove. (17) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.

1)

3)

4)

2)

2)
(18) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1 sensor PWB.

2)

1)

1)

(15) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circular earth plate and the PS roller unit. (16) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS roller unit.
5)

2)

4)

PS roller unit

4)

PS semi-circuler earth plate

2)

1)

3)

7 12

AR-F152 (19) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller. (20) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.

6. Manual paper feed section

A. List
No. Part name Ref. Manual transport roller Cassette detection switch PPD1 sensor PWB Side door detection unit

5)

Back

1 2 3

Clutch unit
4)

Paper feed roller

B. Disassembly procedure Single unit

(1) Remove the screw and remove the single upper cover.

1)
4)

3)

Front
1)

2)

2)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

7 13

AR-F152 (2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit. (4) Remove the PPD1 sensor PWB.

1) 3)

2)

2) 1)

Back

Wire treatment

(3) Remove three screws and remove the single manual feed upper frame.

1)

Wire treatment
1)

(5) Remove the E-ring and remove the manual paper feed transport roller.

2)

4)

3)

3)

1)

2)

7 14

AR-F152 (6) Remove the cassette detection switch.

Multi unit
(1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.

1)

1)

3)

3)

2)

2)

Wire treatment

(2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.

(7) Remove the multi cover.

Orange
Multi cover
1)

Red

2) 1)

Back

Wire treatment

7 15

AR-F152 (3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper frame. (5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller.

1)

1)

1)

1)

1)

3)

2)

2)

L O CK

T O
K

(4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit from the multi paper feed upper frame.

(6) Remove the pick-up roller.

2)
1)

1)

1)

2)

2)

7 16

AR-F152 (7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.

7. Rear frame section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 Mirror motor Main motor Exhaust fan motor Part name Ref.

1)

B. Disassembly procedure
(1) Remove three screws and remove the rear cabinet.
1)

Multi paper feed solnoid

3)

2)
1) 2)

1)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. (2) Remove two screws, the harness, and the mirror motor.

D. Pressure plate holder attachment

(1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not covered with the seal M1-N.

Seal M1-N

Pressure plate holder Attachment reference

3)

1)

2)
Attachment reference

2)

7 17

AR-F152 (3) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main motor.

8. Power section
A. List
No. 1 Power PWB Part name Ref.

B. Disassembly procedure
(1) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the power PWB.

3)

2)

1)

1)

3)
2)

2)

C. Assembly procedure
(4) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaust fan motor. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

9. SPF section
No. A B C D E F G H Sensor PWB Pickup solenoid Clutch Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller Belt SPF motor Paper entry sensor PS roller Paper exit roller Part name Ref.

1)

Pickup unit removal 1) Remove three fixing pawls from the bottom of the machine. 2) Remove the front cover and the rear cover.

3)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
1

7 18

AR-F152 1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame SP, and two harnesses. 2) Remove the pickup unit.
1

B. Pickup solenoid
1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the pickup solenoid

2
1

2 3 4 3

When installing, hang iron core A on the solenoid arm.

C. Clutch
When installing the parts, be careful of the hole position of the paper frame SP. 1) 2) 3) 4) Remove the E-ring. Remove the pulley and bushing. Slide the bushing in the arrow direction. Lift the clutch, and 5) remove the clutch.

A. Sensor PWB
1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit. 2) Remove the upper cover.
2

1 1

1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the sensor PWB. 3) Remove the harness.
1 1

1) Remove the E-ring. 2) Remove the parts.

7 19

AR-F152

D. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller

1) 2) 3) 4) Lift the paper stopper. Slide the takeup roller unit. Slide the bushing in the arrow direction. Remove the takeup roller unit.
A

E. Belt
1) Remove the belt.

F. SPF motor
2 4

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove

the harness. four screws. the drive unit. the belt. two screws. the SPF motor.
2 5

6 1

When installing the takeup roller, hang the projection of the takeup roller unit on the solenoid arm. 1) Remove the parts. 2) Remove the manual paper feed roller. 3) Remove the pickup roller. 4) Remove the parts.
4
3

5 3

2 4

G. Paper entry sensor

2
1

Transport unit removal 1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the document tray unit. 3) Remove five screws. 4) Remove the transport unit.

1) 2) 3) 4)

Loosen the screw. Open the paper exit PG. Remove the paper entry sensor. Remove the harness.

2 3 1

4 3

3 3 1 4
2

7 20

AR-F152

H. PS roller
1) Remove the parts. 2) Remove the PS roller.

1) 2) 3) 4)

Open the right cabinet. Remove three screws. Remove one connector. While tilting down the 2nd connection arm A, pull and remove the paper feed unit toward you.

C
1

D D

2 1

I. Paper exit roller

1) Remove the parts. 2) Remove the paper exit roller.

3 B

A 1 2
When installing, securely insert two bosses C on the machine side and two bosses D on the paper feed unit side. Be sure to fix the earth B. Insert the 2nd page feed.

A. Paper sensor
2
1) Remove the pawl. 2) Remove the paper sensor. 3) Remove the harness.

10. 2nd cassette section

No. A B C D E F Paper sensor Cassette detection SW Paper feed solenoid Transport roller Paper feed clutch 2nd paper feed roller Part name Ref.

2 3

Paper feed unit removal 1) Remove the screw. 2) Remove the rear cover. When installing, engage the pawl and install the unit.

2 A

7 21

AR-F152

B. Cassette detection SW
1) Remove the pawl. 2) Remove the cassette detection SW. 3) Remove the harness.

E. Paper feed clutch

1) Remove the E-ring. 2) Remove the paper feed clutch. 3) Remove the parts.

A 2
3

1
2

C. Paper feed solenoid

1) Remove the screw. 2) Remove the connector. 3) Remove the paper feed solenoid.

When installing, fit the cut surface A.

F. 2nd paper feed roller

1) Remove the E-ring and the parts. 2) Remove the 2nd paper feed roller.

D. Transport roller
1) Remove two E-rings. 2) Remove the transport roller.

2
1

C D
B A 3

2
Install so that the earth spring A is brought into contact over bearing B. When installing, hang the 2nd connection arm on the 2nd connection arm SP B. Be sure to install so that the earth spring C is in contact under the bearing D.

7 22

AR-F152

11. DUP motor section (AR-156 only)

A. Remove the rear cabinet.
1) Remove four screws. 2) Remove the rear cabinet.

D. Remove the DUP motor.

1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the DUP motor cover. 3) Remove the DUP motor.

1 2

B. Remove the shield plate.

1) Remove six screws. 2) Remove the open/close detection unit, and the earth wire. 3) Remove the shield plate.

Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the DUP motor gear with the belt on the main body side.

12. Reverse roller section (AR-156 only)

A. Remove the reverse unit.
1) Remove four screws 2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire 3) Remove the reverse unit.

3 2

2 1

C. Remove the main PWB.

1) Remove six screws. 2) Remove connectors. 3) Remove the main PWB.

3 1

B. Remove the reverse roller.

1) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.

2 2 2

2 2

2 1

7 23

AR-F152

13. RSPF section (AR-156 only)

A. RSPF
(1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove four screws. 2) Remove the rear cabinet.

(3) Remove the RSPF. 1) Remove the connector and the cable. 2) Remove the RSPF.

1 1

1
(2) 1) 2) 3) Remove the shield plate. Remove six screws. Remove the open/close detection unit, and the earth wire. Remove the shield plate.

B. Intermediate tray
1) Remove the intermediate tray.

3 2

C. Upper cover
2 1
1) Remove four screws from the bottom of the main body. 2) Remove the upper cover.

1 1
7 24

AR-F152

D. Pickup unit
1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame spring, and two harnesses. 2) Remove the pickup unit.

F. Sensor PWB
1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the sensor PWB. 3) Remove the harness.

1 3

2
1

1
G. Pickup solenoid

1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the pickup solenoid.

NOTE: When reassembling, be careful of the hole position for the paper feed frame spring.

2 1

E. Upper cover of the pickup unit.

1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit. 2) Remove the upper cover.

2
A

NOTE: When reassembling, hang the iron core on the solenoid arm.

1
7 25

AR-F152

H. Clutch
(1) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Remove the clutch unit. Remove the E-ring. Remove the pulley and the bushing. Slide the bushing in the arrow direction. Lift the clutch pawl. Remove the clutch unit.

I. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller

(1) 1) 2) 3) 4) Remove the pickup unit. Lift the paper stopper. Slide the takeup roller unit. Slide the bushing in the arrow direction. Remove the takeup roller.

1
1

(2) Remove the clutch 1) Remove the E-ring. 2) Remove the parts.

NOTE: When reassembling, hang the convex portion of the roller unit on the solenoid arm. (2) 1) 2) 3) 4) Remove the Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller. Remove the parts. Remove the manual paper feed roller. Remove the pickup roller. Remove the parts.

4 3

7 26

AR-F152

J. Transport unit removal

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove the harness. two screws. the document tray unit. five screws. the transport unit.

L. Belt 2
1) Remove three screws. 2) Remove the drive unit. 3) Remove the belt.

1 1

3
3

4
2

2
NOTE: When reassembling, hang the belt on the boss.

M. SPF motor

1) Remove the harness. 2) Remove two screws. 3) Remove the SPF motor.

K. Belt 1
1) Remove the belt.

N. Solenoid
1) Remove the harness. 2) Remove two screws. 3) Remove the solenoid.

2
7 27

AR-F152

O. Clutch
1) Cut the band with nippers. 2) Remove the harness. 3) Remove the clutch.

(2) 1) 2) 3) 4)

Remove the PS roller. Loosen the screw. Open the paper exit PG. Remove the parts. Remove the PS roller.

2
3
Q. Paper entry sensor
1) 2) 3) 4) Loosen the screw. Open the paper exit PG. Remove the paper entry sensor. Remove the harness.

1 1

P. PS roller
(1) Remove the parts. 1) Remove the two screws. 2) Remove the parts.

4 3

1 2
7 28

AR-F152

R. Transport roller1.
(1) Remove the parts. 1) Remove the parts.

S. Paper exit roller

(1) Remove the parts. 1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the parts.

1 1

(2) 1) 2) 3)

Remove the parts. Loosen the screw. Open the paper exit PG. Remove the parts.

(2) Remove the paper feed PG upper. 1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the paper feed PG upper.

(3) Remove the transport roller. 1) Remove the paper exit PG. 2) Remove the transport roller.

1
(3) Remove the paper exit roller. 1) Remove the parts. 2) Remove the paper exit roller.

2
7 29

AR-F152

T. Solenoid
(1) Remove the reverse gate 1) Remove the ring 2) Remove the reverse gate

14. FAX, MCU PWB section (AR-F152 only)

A. Remove the rear cover.
1) Remove four screws. 2) Hold the SPF sensor. 3) Remove the rear cover.

1
2

2
1

3 1 1

B. Remove the PWB cover FAX2.

NOTE: When reassembling, be careful of the groove and the hole positions of the spring. NOTE: When reassembling, hang 2) on the solenoid. (2) Remove the solenoid. 1) Remove the screw. 2) Remove the solenoid. 1) Remove five screws. 2) Remove the PWB cover FAX2.

1 1

2
1 1

2 1

C. Remove the FAX PWB.

Remove the connector. 1) Remove seven screws. 2) Remove the FAX PWB.

1 2 1

7 30

AR-F152

D. Remove the PWB cover FAX.

1) Remove six screws. 2) Remove the PWB cover FAX.

B. Remove the metal fixtures.

1) Disconnect the connector. 2) Remove four screws. 3) Remove the metal fixtures F and R.
1

2 3

2 3
1

1 1

2 1

E. Remove the MCU PWB.

Disconnect the connectors. 1) Remove seven screws. 2) Remove the MCU PWB.

C. Remove the FAX operation panel.

1) 2) 3) 4) Remove Remove Remove Remove the belt, the screw, and two connectors. the FAX operation panel. two screws. U-turn PG.

2 3 4
1 1

15. FAX-SPF section (AR-F152 only)

A. Remove the front and the rear covers.
1) Disengage three pawls. 2) Remove the front and the rear covers. Wiring

7 31

AR-F152

D. Remove the FAX operation panel unit.

1) Remove five screws. 2) Remove the FAX operation panel unit.

G. Remove the PU solenoid

1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the PU solenoid.

2 1

E. Remove the Fax panel PWB.

1) Remove eleven screws. 2) Remove the FAX panel PWB. 3) Remove the connector.

H. Remove the clutch unit.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Remove the E-ring. the pulley, and the bushing. Slide the bushing in the arrow direction. Lift the clutch pawl. Remove the clutch unit.

1 2 5 3

3 1

F. Remove the FAX sensor PWB.

1) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the FAX sensor PWB. 3) Remove the connector.

I. Remove the clutch

1) Remove the E-ring. 2) Remove the parts.

3
1

7 32

AR-F152

J. Remove the pickup unit.

1) 2) 3) 4) Lift the paper stopper. Slide the pickup roller unit in the arrow direction. Slide the bushing. Remove the pickup roller unit.
3

M. Remove the belt.

1) Remove the belt.

4 A

N. Remove the SPF motor.

(Note) When installing, hang the projection of the roller unit on the solenoid arm. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove the connector. four screws. the drive frame. the belt. two screws. the SPF motor.
6 2
4 3 1

K. Remove the manual feed roller and the pickup roller.

1) Remove the parts. 2) Remove the manual feed roller. 3) Remove the pickup roller and the parts.

5 3

4
1 2

L. Remove the transport unit.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove the connector. two screws. the document tray unit. four screws. the transport unit.

(Note) When installing, attach the belt as shown in the figure.

3 1 4

7 33

AR-F152

O. Remove the paper entry sensor.

1) 2) 3) 4) Loosen the screw. Open the paper exit PG. Remove the paper entry sensor. Remove the connector.

Q. Remove the paper exit roller.

1) Remove the parts. 2) Remove the paper exit roller.
1

4
2

16. Procedures after replacement of FAX ROM (AR-F152 only)

After replacement of FAX ROM, perform the following procedures. q Perform the FAX software switch clear and the FAX image memory clear. 1) FAX software clear procedure On the Fax operation panel: FUNCTION 9 8 # ENTER 0 2 1 2) FAX image memory clear procedure On the FAX operation panel: FUNCTION 9 8 # ENTER 1 0 1 (Note) When the ROM version is upgraded, the area used by each job for D-RAM memory area may vary. Therefore, this procedure must be performed after repalcement of ROM to stabilize the operation. Perform this procedure immediately after turning OFF/ON the power after replacement of ROM.

1 2

P. Remove the PS roller.

1) Remove the parts. 2) Remove the PS roller.

2 1

7 34

AR-F152

[8] ADJUSTMENT
1. Optical section
A. Image distortion adjustment
There are following two types of image distortion. q Horizontal image distortion q Vertical image distortion In this machine, the image distortion is adjusted by changing the parallelism of mirrors (copy lamp unit, No. 2/3 mirror unit). (1) Horizontal image distortion adjustment a. Summary Parallelism of mirrors can be made by installing the copy lamp unit and No. 2/3 mirror unit to the reference position. However, it must be checked by making a copy, and must be adjusted if necessary. b. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror unit are disassembled or their part is replaced. 2) When the copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror unit drive section is disassembled or its part is replaced. 3) When the copy image is distorted as shown below:

d. Adjustment procedure 1) Remove the right cabinet (manual paper feed unit), the document reference plate. 2) Remove the document glass.

1)

2) 3)

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the copy lamp unit wire.

Document

Copy A

Copy B

c. Necessary tools q Screwdriver (+) q Hex wrench q Scale q Test chart for distortion adjustment (Make a chart shown below by yourself.) Draw a rectangle on a paper (B4 or 8 1/2 14) as shown below. Be sure to make four right angles.

L = 10mm
L

Fixing Screws

4) Manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive gear to bring No.2/3 mirror unit into contact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate. When No.2/3 mirror unit makes contact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate in the Freat and rear frame side simultaneously, the mechanical parallelism of No.2/3 mirror unit is proper. If one side of No.2/3 mirror unit makes contact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate and the other side does not, the parallelism is improper. If the parallelism is improper, perform the procedure of step 5).

8 1

AR-F152 7) Manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive gear to bring No.2/3 mirror unit into contact with the positioning plate, and perform the procedure of step 4). Repeat procedures of steps 4) to 7) until the parallelism of No.2/3 mirror unit is properly set. 8) With No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate in contact with No.2/3 mirror unit, bring the copy lamp unit into contact with the right frame and fix the copy lamp unit to the drive wire. Procedures 1) to 8) are for adjustment of mechanical horizontal parallelism. The copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror are fixed to the specified positions and the mechanical horizontal parallelism of No.2/3 mirror is adjusted. Then the optical horizontal parallelism must be adjusted in the following procedures.

Copy lamp unit projection

5) Loosen the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulley setscrew in the side where No.2/3 mirror unit does not make contact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate.

Set screw

9) Set the image distortion check chart on the document table, and make a reduction copy (75%) on an A4 or 11 8 1/2 paper with the document cover open.

Scanner unit drive pulley

6) Without moving the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulley shaft, manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulley in the same direction of the loosened setscrew. When it makes contact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate, tighten and fix the setscrew.

50mm

Image distortion check chart

8 2

AR-F152 10) Check the horizontal image distortion. If LL = LR, there is no horizontal distortion
LL and LR: Distance between the copy image horizontal line and the edge of the black LR background. Black background

(2) Vertical image distortion adjustment a. Summary In this adjustment, the left and right balance is adjusted by changing the left and right balance of the No. 2 scanner unit frame on the front frame side. b. Note q Horizontal image distortion adjustment c. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive section is disassembled or its part is replaced. 2) When the copy image is distorted as follows:

LL

11) If LL is not equal to LR, perform the following procedure. Loosen the setscrew of the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulley in the front or the rear frame.

Document

Copy C

Copy D

Set screw

d. Necessary tools q Screwdriver (+) q Screwdriver () q Scale q Test chart for distortion adjustment (Make by yourself.) Draw a rectangle on A4 or 8 1/2 11 paper as shown below: Be sure to make four right angles.

Scanner unit drive pulley

12) Without moving the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulley shaft, manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulley whose setscrew was loosened, and adjust the parallelism of copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit.

L = 10mm
L
e. Adjustment procedure 1) Set the test chart for image distortion adjustment on the document glass, and make a normal copy on a paper of A4 or 8 1/2 11. 2) Check image distortion in the right and the left sides. If the both vertical lines are in parallel with each other, the rightleft distortion balance is proper. (However, there may be some distortion.) 2) If all the four angles are right angles, there in no distortion and the following procedures are not required.

Greater distortion

Smaller distortion

13) Tighten the set screw of the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulley. 14) Check the image distortion in the same manner as step 10). Repeat procedures 11) to 14) until horizontal image distortion is eliminated.

8 3

AR-F152 3) If the right-left distortion balance is improper, loosen the fixing screw of No.2/3 mirror unit rail to change and adjust the right-left balance of No.2/3 mirror unit rail. (1) Outline The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment is made automatically or manually. Automatic adjustment: The width of the reference line marked on the shading correction plate is scanned to perform the main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically. Manual adjustment: The adjustment is made by manual key operations. (In either of the automatic and manual adjustments, the zoom data register set value is changed for adjustment.) The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by changing the mirror base (scanner) scanning speed. (2) Main scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment a. Note Before performing this adjustment, the following adjustments must have been completed. If not, this adjustment cannot be performed properly. q Image distortion adjustment q The lens unit must be installed in the reference position. b. Cases when the adjustment is required (Note) If the distortion in the lead edge side (when viewed in the paper transport direction) is greater, change the height of the left rail of No.2/3 mirror unit. If the distortion in the rear edge side (when viewed in the paper transport direction) is greater, change the height of the right rail of No.2/3 mirror unit. 1) When the lens and the mirror unit are disassembled or the part is replaced. 2) When the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive section is disassembled or the part is replaced. 3) When the main PWB is replaced. 4) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 5) When U2 trouble occurs. 6) When the copy image distortion adjustment is performed. c. Necessary tools q Screwdriver (+) q Scale d. Adjustment procedure 1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.)
Change the height of the left side of the rail.

Change the height of the right side of the rail.

4) Make a copy to check the vertical image distortion. If the four angles are right angles, the adjustment is completed.

B. Copy magnification ratio adjustment

The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use SIM 48-1.

2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 812 11 paper.

8 4

AR-F152 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. 5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio. Main scanning direction magnification ratio =
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.) Original (Scale)
HARDDENCD STAINLESS

Copy image dimensions 100 (%) Original dimension

mm 1/2mm

JAPAN

10

20

100

110

120

130

140

150
Shizuoka

HARDDENCD STAINLESS

Paper feed direction

mm 1/2mm

JAPAN

10

20

100

110

120

130

140

150
Shizuoka

Reference

Comparison point

Copy

110

6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the main scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the copy mode select key. In the case of the automatic adjustment, when the PRINT switch is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading to scan the width of the reference line, calculating the correction value and displaying and storing this value. After execution of the automatic adjustment, go out from the simulation mode and make a copy to check the magnification ratio. If the magnification ratio is not in the specified range (100 1.0%), manually adjust as follows. Adjustment mode Main scanning direction auto copy magnification ratio adjustment Main scanning direction manual copy magnification ratio adjustment Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment Lighting lamp Auto exposure lamp ON Manual exposure lamp ON Photo exposure lamp ON

b. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the lens and the mirror unit are disassembled or the part is replaced. 2) When the scanner unit drive section is disassembled or the part is replaced. 3) When the main PWB is replaced. 4) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 5) When U2 trouble occurs. 6) When the copy image distortion adjustment is performed. c. Necessary tools q Screwdriver (+) q Scale d. Adjustment procedure 1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.)

8) Set the adjustment mode to Manual with the copy mode select key. 9) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the COPY button. 10) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is within the speoified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%. (3) Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio a. Note Before performing this adjustment, the following adjustments must have been completed. If not, this adjustment cannot be performed properly. q Image distortion adjustment q Must be installed to the lens unit reference position. 2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 812 11 paper. 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. 5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio. Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio = Copy image dimension 100 (%)
Original dimension

8 5

AR-F152

110

Original (Scale)
HARDDENCD STAINLESS

mm 1/2mm

JAPAN

10

20

100

110

120

130

140

150
Shizuoka

HARDDENCD STAINLESS

mm 1/2mm

JAPAN

Paper feed direction

10

20

100

110

120

130

140

150
Shizuoka

Reference

Comparison point

Copy

6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. (100 1.0%). If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the copy mode select key. (Photo exposure lamp ON) 8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the COPY button. Repeat procedures 1) 8) until the sub scanning direction actual copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.

D. Image position adjustment

There are following five kinds of image position adjustments, which are made by laser control except for the image scan start position adjustment. For the adjustments, SIM 50 01 and SIM 50 10 are used. No. 1 2 3 4 5 Adjustment item Print start position Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount Center offset Simulation 50 01 50 01 50 01 50 01 50 10

C. Lens unit attachment reference

Attach the lens unit so that the lens unit number on the lens adjustment plate is aligned with the scribe line on the base plate.

To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50 01, use the copy density select key. The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. Adjustment mode Print start position Image lead edge void amount Lighting lamp Auto (AE) lamp Manual (TEXT) lamp Photo lamp Auto, Manual, Photo lamps

Lens unit number

Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount

() direction Reference line (0) (+) direction

To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50 10, use the copy mode select key. The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. Machine with the multi manual paper feed unit Adjustment mode Lighting lamp Auto, Cassette Auto, Manual Auto, Manual

Example: Lens unit number 2.8 Attach the lens unit at 2 scales in the paper exit direction from the reference line. Note: Never touch the other screws than the unit attachment screw. The lens unit is supplied only in a whole unit.

Print center offset (cassette) Print center offset (manual feed) Document center offset

Machine with the single manual paper feed unit Print center offset (cassette) Print center offset (manual feed) Document center offset Auto Auto, Manual Auto, Cassette

8 6

AR-F152 (1) Lead edge adjustment 1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2 14 paper. 3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.

Void amount (Standard value: 2 3mm)

Scale image Paper rear edge

2) Execute SIM 50 01 3) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position (PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at 100%. 4) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale image. Set C = 10 R (mm). (Example: Set the value of C to 30.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 5) Measure the distance (H mm) between the paper lead edge and the image print start position. Set A = 10 H (mm). (Example: Set the value of A to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is shifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50) 6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). When the value of B is increased by 10, the void amount is increased by about 1mm. For 25 or less, however, the void amount becomes zero. (Default: 50)

4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. The default value is 50. Note: The rear edge void cannot be checked with the first sheet after entering the simulation mode, the first sheet after turning off/on the power, or the first sheet after inserting the cassette. Use the second or later sheet to check the rear edge void. (3) Center offset adjustment 1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document guide. q Test chart for the center position adjustment Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2 11 paper in the paper transport direction.
Document guide

(Example) Distance between paper lead edge and image: H = 5mm

Image loss: R = 3mm

Center Copy paper (A4 or 8 1/2 11)

5mm

10mm

(2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment 1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11 8 1/2 paper size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2 14 paper.

2) Execute SIM 50 10 to select the print center offset (cassette paper feed) adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. 3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly positioned. The standard value is 0 2mm from the paper center.

(Copy A)

2.0mm or less

Copy image

B4 or 8 1/2 14 paper
Shift

Copy paper folding line

A4 size rear edge

(Copy B)
2.0mm or less

Copy image Copy paper folding line

Shift (Paper feed direction)

2) Execute SIM 50 01 to select the image rear edge void amount adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.

8 7

AR-F152 4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by 0.1mm toward the rear frame. q For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures. q Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by the CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of document guide, there is no need to adjust manually.

E. Copy density adjustment procedure

Use SIM 46-01 to set the copy density for each copy mode. For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key. (1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting 1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter) reference line on the document table. Then place a B4 (14 8 1/2) white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.

2. Copy density adjustment

A. Copy density adjustment timing
The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases: q When maintenance is performed. q When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted. q When the optical section is cleaned. q When a part in the optical section is replaced. q When the optical section is disassembled. q When the OPC drum is replaced. q When the main control PWB is replaced. q When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced. q When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.

White paper

B. Note for copy density adjustment

1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment q Clean the optical section. q Clean or replace the charger wire. q Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the developing bias voltage are in the specified range.

Test chart

C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment

q One of the following test charts:

UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE

q B4 (14 8 1/2) white paper q The user program AE setting should be 3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

(2) Perform the adjustment in each mode. 1) Execute SIM 46-1. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key. Set the exposure level to 3 for all adjustment. (Except for the auto mode.)

(1)
Test chart comparison table UKOG0162FCZZ DENSITY No. UKOG0089CSZZ DENSITY No. KODAK GRAY SCALE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

(2)

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.5 1.9

(1) Mode select key/display lamp (2) Exposure level select key/display lamp

19

D. Features of copy density adjustment

For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided in the image process LSI is used. List of the adjustment modes Auto Mode Manual Mode Photo Mode Manual T/S mode T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 1 step only Adjustment mode Auto mode Manual mode Photo mode Manual T/S mode Auto T/S mode Exposure mode display lamp Auto lamp ON Manual lamp ON Photo lamp ON Manual lamp/Photo lamp ON Auto lamp/Photo lamp ON Exposure level 3 3 3 3 Sharp gray chart adjustment level 3 is slightly copied. 3 is slightly copied. 3 is slightly copied. 4 is slightly copied. 4 is slightly copied.

8 8

AR-F152 3) Make a copy. Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale). Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

B. DV bias adjustment
Note:
q A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1G must be

used for correct adjustment.

Procedures
1. Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V. 2. Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the connector CN10-2 (FG). 3. Execute SIM 8-1. (The developing bias is outputted for 30 sec.) 4. Adjust the control volume (VR-121) so that the output voltage is 400 5V.

Non toner save mode

Not copied.

Slightly copied.

10

Toner save mode

Not copied.

Slightly copied.

(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy quantity display. (When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy quantity display. * The value can be set in the range of 1 99.

3. High voltage adjustment

A. Main charger (Grid bias)
Note:
q Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10M or

more measurement.
q After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output.

Do not reverse the sequence.

Procedures
1. Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V. 2. Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3 (GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the negative side to the frame ground (radiating plate). 3. Execute SIM 8-3. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage LOW output mode.) 4. Adjust the control volume (VR-141) so that the output voltage is 400 20V. 5. Execute SIM 8-2. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.) 6. Adjust the control volume (VR-142) so that the output voltage is 580 10V.

4. Duplex adjustment
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying
This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode. That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is once stored in memory. The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OC mode)and stored in memory. This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data. In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjusted by changing the document read end position. (Adjustment procedure) 1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)

5 10

8 9

AR-F152 2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode.
Scale (S-D mode) Scale (D-S mode)

(Adjustment procedure) (1) Paper trailing edge void quantity 1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper) 2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.
Document guide The trailing edge has a scale

3) Execute simulation 50-18 to make a copy and check the front edge image loss at the area where the scale is printed. Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0 mm in the R-SPF mode. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in image loss.
Front edge of paper

Table glass

The front edge of the scale on test chart

Void area

less than 4 mm

5 10

3) Using the user simulation [18], set the paper size of the first cassette. Letter paper: 4 A4 paper: 3 4) Execute simulation 50-19 to turn on the TEXT lamp and make the printing mode in OC-D mode. Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale on the image.
Void position to be check

Paper

The trailing edge void on the first printing surface is shown above.

2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)

Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area. (2) Image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF) 1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below.

B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode

This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void) in duplex copying. In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper jam at the fusing part. There are two adjustment modes: 1) Image cut rear end void quantity (R-SPF) 50-19(AE) The size (length) of a document read from the R-SPF is detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.) 2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (TEXT) This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing. The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF) is adjusted.

Scale (D-D mode)

2) Execute simulation 50-19 to turn on the AE lamp and make the printing mode in the D-D mode. 3) Remove and reinsert the cassette. NOTE: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during this adjustment. 4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image. Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area.

8 10

AR-F152

5. Density section
A. FAX mode density adjustment (Overall mode) (<FAX mode> SIM 46-12)
1) Set the test chart (TRAP23109SCZZ <CCITT #3 chart>) on the OC table as shown below, and close the OC cover.

B. FAX mode density adjustment (Individual mode) (<FAX mode> SIM 46-14 16)
1) Set the test chart (TRAP23109SCZZ CCITT #3 chart) on the OC table as shown below, and close the OC cover.

A4
A4

A4
A4
Glass holding plate
Glass holding plate

2) Switch to the FAX mode and execute SIM 46-12. 3) After warming up, shading is performed and the current density level is displayed on the lower two digits of the display section in standard and auto density mode. 4) Enter the set value with the 10-key to adjust the FAX image density. 5) Make a copy, and adjust so that the following adjustment specification is satisfied. When an adjustment is made in this mode, the exposure level for each communication mode and each density mode are automatically adjusted accordingly. <Adjustment specifications> Density mode Auto Resolution mode Standard CCITT #3 chart output result 3 is slightly copied. Set range 1 99

2) Switch to the FAX mode and execute SIM 46-14 to 46-16 depending on the adjustment mode. 3) After warming up, shading is performed and the current density level is displayed on the lower two digits of the display section. 4) Enter the set value with the 10-key to adjust the FAX image density. 5) Make a copy, and adjust the density with the copy as a reference. <Adjustment specifications> Resolution mode Fine Density changeover Switched with the density select key. Switched with the density select key. Switched with the density select key. SIM FAX mode 46-14 FAX mode 46-15 FAX mode 46-16 Set value The greater the set value is, the greater the density is, and vice versa. Set range 1 99

SIM

Set value

Super fine Ultra fine

FAX mode 46-12

The greater the set value is, the greater the density is, and vice versa.

8 11

AR-F152

6. Communication section
Note: These items are factory adjusted when shipping according to FCC standards. Therefore, do not change the setting in the market.

6) Start transmission from the line.

H:xx L:yy 1:YES 2:NO SENDING DTMF

xx: High group soft SW set value yy: Low group soft SW set value SIM Soft SW SW531 4 SW535 8 Initial value 3.5dB (7) 3.5dB (7) Set value SW set value: 0 15 Transmission level: 0 7.5db 0.5ms step (Binary input)

A. Dial test (<FAX mode> SIM 66-13)

(1) Dial pulse transmission test 1) Execute SIM 66-13 in FAX mode. 2) Execute the dial pulse mode according to the instructions on the LCD display.

SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF

3) Set the make time.

INPUT MAKE TIME (015)

4) Select the dial to be transmitted. Default: 0123456789# (After deleting with the clear key, it can be set to any desired value.) 5) Transmission is started from the line.

DTMF transmission level

High (FAX group mode) 66-13 Low group (Test only)

SEND yyPPS xxm s 1:YES 2:NO SENDING yyPPS xxm s

SIM Dial pulse make time 10 PPS FAX mode 66-13

Soft SW SW671 4

Initial value 40ms (14)

Set value SW set value: 0 15 Make time: 25 41ms 1ms step (Binary input)

(2) DTMF signal transmission level adjustment 1) Execute SIM 66-13 in the FAX mode. 2) Execute the DTMF mode according to the instructions on the LCD display.

SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF

3) Select the signal transmission level. The signal transmission level is classified into two groups: the high group, and the low group. Transmission can be made with either of default and the soft SW set value.

SELECT HIGH LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. SELECT LOW LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
4) The transmission level can be set when the following menu is displayed on the LCD. (et value 1 = 0.5dB change)

INPUT VALUE (015)

(This value is returned to the original value when the simulation mode is canceled.) 5) Select the dial signal to be transmitted. Default: 0123456789# (After deleting with the clear key, it can be set to any desired value.)

8 12

AR-F152

[9] SIMULATION, FAX SOFTWARE SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES

1. List of simulations
The simulations for the AR-F152 (with Fax functions) are shown in bold fonts. Sim No. 01 02 Kind of main code Optical system SPF Individual load operation Sub code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 01 02 03 01 02 Operation Mirror scan operation SPF sensor status display Motor ON Paper feed solenoid ON Pressure release solenoid ON (RSPF) Resist clutch ON (RSPF) Gate solenoid ON (RSPF) Operation panel display check Fusing lamp ON + Cooling fan HIGH/LOW speed Copy lamp ON Paper feed solenoid ON Resist solenoid ON Sim No. 26 Kind of main code Various setup Sub code 01 02 03 04 06 07 20 30 37 39 40 42 43 44 47 01 06 01 02 03 06 None None None 01 Warm up display and aging with jam Intermittent aging Developing bias Main charger (Grid high) Grid voltage (Low) Transfer charger Toner motor aging Cancel troubles other than U2 Cancel of U2 trouble Maintenance/mini-maintenance counter clear Maintenance cycle setup Mini-maintenance cycle setup 46 Exposure adjustment 55 01 Operation Manual feed setup SPF setup Second cassette setup Machine duplex setup Destination setup Machine conditions check Rear edge void setup CE mark conformity control ON/OFF setup Cancel of stop at developer over Memory capacity setup Polygon motor OFF time setup Transfer ON timing control setup Side void setup SPF document rear edge read setup FAX document rear edge scan setup CRUM destination display Paper sensor status display

05

Lamp ON check

06

07

Machine individual load operation Aging

30

08

High voltage output check Other Trouble reset U2 trouble reset Maintenance counter clear Counter setup (When maintenance) Counter display

10 14 16 20

43

Sensor operation check (Standard provision) Fusing temperature setup

01 04 05 09 01 12 13 14 15

21

01 02

22

01 02 04 05 06 08 12 14 17 18 20 21 22 23 24

24

Special counter clear

01 04 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 14 01

25

Main motor ON

10

Maintenance/mini-maintenance counter display Maintenance/mini-maintenance preset display Jam total counter display Total counter display Developer counter display SPF counter display Drum counter display P-ROM version display Copy counter display Printer counter display FAX print counter display Scanner counter display SPF jam total counter display FAX reception counter display FAX transmission counter display Jam total counter clear SPF counter clear Developer counter clear Drum counter clear Copy counter clear Printer counter clear FAX transmission/reception counter clear FAX print counter clear Scanner counter clear SPF jam total counter clear Main motor system ON + Cooling fan low speed (For the duplex model, the duplex motor is simultaneously turned on.) Polygon motor ON 9 1

48

50

Magnification ratio correction Lead edge adjustment

19 01

Normal copy Fusing temperature setup 2 Duplex mode fusing temperature setup Postcard size paper fusing control setup Copy density adjustment FAX density overall adjustment FAX density adjustment (Standard mode) FAX density adjustment (Fine character mode) FAX density adjustment (Super Fine mode) Table adjustment (Copy mode) Front/rear scan direction

01

10 18 19 51 61 Timing adjustment Laser system operation Shading Self print FAX PWB check Program Download 02 06 03

Lead edge image position adjustment Paper lead edge/rear edge void adjustment Paper center offset + OC/Document center offset + SPF document center offset Memory reverse position adjustment Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment Resist quantity adjustment SPF exposure correction Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check) Shading check Self print only with the engine (1 by 2 mode) Simulation on the FAX panel (For details, refer to the FAX simulation.) PCL PWB program download

63 64 66

01 01 None

67

14

AR-F152

2. Contents of simulations (new or revised simulations only)

Input method: Clear key Exposure Select key Clear key Exposure Select key Main code 01 Sub code 01 Content Mirror scan operation (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the mirror home position is detected. Sensor name Mirror home position sensor Display lamp OPC drum cartridge replacement lamp

2. When the _START key is pressed, scanning is executed at the speed corresponding to the currently set copy magnification ratio. The copy magnification ratio can be arbitrarily set with the magnification ratio select key/zoom key. 02 02 SPF sensor status display ON/OFF of the sensors in the SPF can be checked with the following lamps. Display Toner cartridge replacement lamp Jam lamp Developer replacement lamp SPF jam lamp Sensor Document set detection (SPID) SPF document transport detection (SPPD) SPF cover open detection (SCOD) SPF open/close detection (SDSW) FAX document size detection Paper size detection FAX/SPF B4 size detection (SB4D)

SPF lamp 03

Motor ON (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the SPF motor rotates for 10 sec at the speed corresponding to the currently set magnification ratio. Paper feed solenoid ON (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the SPF paper feed solenoid repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times. Pressure release solenoid ON (RSPF) (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the RSPF document transport solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times. Resist clutch ON (RSPF) (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the RSPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times. Gate solenoid ON (RSPF) (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the RSPF gate solenoid (SGS) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times. Operation panel display check When the PRINT switch is pressed, the LED on the operation panel is lighted for 5 sec. The LED on the FAX panel and the LCD black background are displayed simultaneously. Fusing lamp ON + cooling fan HIGH/LOW speed (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500msec) 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan rotates in the high speed mode. After completion of the operation, the cooling fan rotates in the low speed mode. Copy lamp ON (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for 5 sec. Paper feed solenoid ON (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the paper feed solenoid selected by the tray select key repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500ms) 20 times. Resist solenoid ON (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the resist solenoid (RRS) repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500ms) 20 times.

04

05

06

07

05

01

02

03

06

01

02

9 2

AR-F152

Main code 07

Sub code 01

Content Warm-up display and aging with jam (Operation/Procedure) 1. When the simulation is executed, warming up is started. 2. Warm-up time is counted and displayed every second on the copy quantity display. 3. After completion of warm-up, the time count is stopped and the ready lamp is lighted. 4. Press the clear key to clear the warm-up time display, set the copy quantity, and press the START key, and the machine will copy the set quantity repeatedly. Intermittent aging (Operation/Procedure) 1. When the simulation is executed, warming up is started. 2. After completion of warm-up, the ready lamp is lighted. 3. Set the copy quantity and press the START key, and the machine will copy the set quantity repeatedly. 4. After 3 sec of the interval time from completion of copying the set quantity, the machine will resume copying. 5. The above operation 4 is repeated. Developing bias (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the developing bias is outputted for 30 sec. Main charger (Grid high) (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH mode. Grid voltage (Low) (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage LOW mode. Transfer charger (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the transfer charger output is supplied for 30 sec. Toner motor aging (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the toner motor output is supplied for 30 sec. Cancel of troubles other than U2 (Operation/Procedure) After canceling the trouble, the simulation is also automatically canceled. Cancel of U2 trouble (Operation/Procedure) 1. When the START key is pressed, the EEPROM total counter check sum is rewritten and the trouble is canceled. 2. After canceling the trouble, the simulation is also automatically canceled. Maintenance/mini-maintenance counter clear When the Print switch is pressed, the maintenance counter is cleared, and 000000 is displayed. When the destination has been set to Japan AB series, the mini-maintenance counter is cleared. Maintenance cycle setup The currently set maintenance cycle code is displayed (initial display), and the set data is stored. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 Setup 3,000 sheets 6,000 sheets 9,000 sheets 13,000 sheets 25,000 sheets Free (999,999 sheets) Default

06

08

01

02

03

06

10

None

14

None

16

None

20

01

21

01

02

Mini-maintenance cycle setup (Valid only when the destination is set to Japan AB series.) The current set code of maintenance cycle is displayed (Initial display), and the set data is stored. Code 0 1 2 Setup 5,000 sheets Default 10,000 sheets Free (999,999 sheets)

9 3

AR-F152

Main code 22

Sub code 01

Content Maintenance/mini-maintenance counter display The display is the same as the total counter value display. When the destination is set to other than Japan AB series, the maintenance counter is displayed. When the destination is set to Japan AB series, the mini-maintenance counter is displayed. The display is the same as the total counter value display. Maintenance/mini-maintenance preset display The preset value corresponding to the code set in 21-01 and 21-02. The display is the same as the total counter value display. When the destination is set to other than Japan AB series, the maintenance preset value is displayed. When the destination is set to Japan AB series, the mini-maintenance preset value is displayed. Jam total counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. Total counter display The total count value is dispalyed in 3 digits 2 times repeatedly. <Display example: 12345> 012 Blank 345 Blank 012 0.7s 0.3s 0.7s 1.0s 0.7s Developer counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. SPF counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. Drum counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. P-ROM versiondisplay The P-ROM version is displayed in 3 digits on the value display section. (AR, DM, PCL models: 100% Zoom lamp display) Copy counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. Printer counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. Fax print counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. Scanner counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. SPF jam total counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. FAX reception counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. FAX transmission counter display The display method is the same as the total count value display. Jam total counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the jam total count value is reset to 0. SPF counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the SPF count value is reset to 0. Developer counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the drum count value is reset to 0. Drum counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the drum count value is reset to 0. Copy counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the copy count value is reset to 0. Printer counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the printer count value is reset to 0. FAX transmission/reception counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the FAX transmission/reception count value is reset to 0. FAX print counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the Fax print-out count value is reset to 0. Scanner counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the scanner count value is reset to 0.

02

04 05

06 08 12 14

17 18 20 21 22 23 24 24 01 04 06 07 08 09 10 11 13

9 4

AR-F152

Main code 24 25

Sub code 14 01

Content SPF jam total counter clear When the PRINT switch is pressed, the SPF jam total count value is reset to 0. Main motor system ON + Cooling fan low speed (For the duplex model, the duplex motor is simultaneously turned on.) (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the main motor is rotated for 30 sec. To save toner consumption, the different operations are executed depending on installation of the developing unit. When the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are also outputted. When the developing unit is not installed, only the motor is rotated. Do not turn on the door open/close switch forcibly to execute this simulation. Polygon motor ON (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the polygon motor is operated for 30sec. Manual feed setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set bypass code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number corresponding to the bypass and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. Code number 0 1 Bypass Single bypass Multi bypass

10

26

01

02

SPF setup When this simulation is executed, the currently set SPF code number is displayed. Enter the code number of the SPF to be set and press the PRINT switch. The setup is changed. Code No. 0 1 2 SPF Without SPF With SPF (Setup is required when installing FAX.) With RSPF

03

Second cassette setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of the second cassette is displayed. 2. Enter the code number and press the start key. The setting is changed. Code number 0 1 Second cassette Without second cassette With second cassette

04

Machine duplex setup (Operation/procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set duplex code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number corresponding to the duplex and press the ENTER key, and the setup will be changed. Code number 0 1 Duplex Without Duplex With Duplex

06

Destination setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set destination code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number corresponding to the destination and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. Code number 0 1 2 Destination Inch series EX AB series Japan AB series

9 5

AR-F152

Main code 26

Sub code 07

Content Machine conditions check (Operation/Procedure) When this simulation is executed, the current machine setting is displayed. CPM 10 cpm 12 cpm 15 cpm Copy quantity display 10 12 15

The machine type is shown with the lamp display. No setup: None BTA-A: AE mode lamp ON BTA-B: TEXT mode lamp ON BTA-C: Photo mode lamp ON

20

Rear edge void setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of rear edge void setting is displayed. 2. Enter the code number of rear edge void setting and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. Code number 0 1 Rear edge void setting Rear edge void allowed Rear edge void not allowed

30

CE mark conformity control ON/OFF setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of CE mark application is displayed. 2. Enter the code number of CE mark application and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. Code number 0 1 CE mark application setting CE mark application control OFF CE mark application control ON

37

Cancel of stop at developer life over When this simulation is executed, the current set code is displayed. Enter a new code and press the PRINT switch, and the entered code is registered. Code number 0 1 Setting Stop at developer life over Stop cancel at developer life over

39

Memory capacity setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. Code number 0 1 2 Setting No memory 4 Mbyte 6 Mbyte

40

Polygon motor OFF time setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. Code number 0 1 2 3 Setting 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec

9 6

AR-F152

Main code 26

Sub code 42

Content Transfer ON timing control setup (Operation / Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. (For any number different from the following ones, the default time is automatically set.) Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Setting Default (330 msec) 40 msec 30 msec 20 msec 10 msec Default (330 msec) +10 msec +20 msec +30 msec +40 msec

43

Side void setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of the side void amount is displayed. 2. Enter the code number and press the start key. The setting is changed. Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Setting 0 mm 0.5 mm 1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm *Default 2.5 mm 3.0 mm 3.5 mm 4.0 mm 4.5 mm 5.0 mm

44

SPF document rear edge read setup + Fax document rear edge scan setup. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press the START key, and the display will be changed. The document rear edge scanning area in SPF reduction (less than 100%) copy is changed. The code number is changeable in the range of 0 8. The default value is 4, and 2 mm of the document rear edge is cut. When the value is changed by 1, the area is changed by 1 mm.

47

FAX document rear edge scan setup When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press the print switch, and the setup is switched. The scan area at the rear edge of FAX original with SPF is changed according to the entered code number. Code number is in the range of 0 8. The default is 4. When set to the default, the area of about 2 mm from the rear edge of the original is cut out. When the value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed by about 1 mm. CRUM destination display When this simulation is executed, the current setup of the CRUM destination stored in the machine is displayed. Code number 00 01 02 03 Setting No setup BTA-A BTA-B BTA-C

55

9 7

AR-F152

Main code 30

Sub code 01

Content Paper sensor status display The paper sensor status is displayed with the lamps on the operation panel. Display Toner cartridge replacement lamp JAM lamp Developer cartridge replacement lamp 2nd cassette lamp AE lamp Exposure level 1 (Light) lamp Exposure level 5 (Dark) lamp Sensor Paper detection before resist (PPD1) Fusing section paper detection (PPD2) Paper exit paper detection (POD) 2nd CS paper detection (PPD3) Single manual feed paper detection (MFD) Main cassette A4 width detection (PSW1) 2nd cassette A4 width detection (PSW2)

43

01

Fusing temperature setup (Normal copy) (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 Set temperature (C) 175 180 185 190 195 ( Default) 200

04

Fusing temperature setup 2 (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 Set temperature (C) 155 160 165 170 ( Default) 175 180

05

Duplex mode fusing temperature setup (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. 2. Enter the code number corresponding to the duplex and press the START key. The setting is changed accordingly. Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Shift temperature (C) 0C 8C 6C 4C 2C 0C +2C +4C +6C +8C

The above shift temperature set by this simulation is added to the fusing temperature of single copy. 09 Postcard size paper fusing control setup Code number 0 1 Setup Cancel (Default) Setup

9 8

AR-F152

Main code 46

Sub code 01

Content Copy density adjustment (Outline) Used to adjust the copy density in each copy mode.(The copy density can be set by changing the set value of ASIC GAMMA ADJUST register.) Setting in each copy mode is performed at exposure level 3. When the copy density (exposure) is adjusted arbitrarily, the max, and min. exposure levels are automatically calculated and set. (The change amounts (gradient, change amount) at level 1 5 are predetermined.) (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, warming up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed in two digits. 2. Press the copy mode select key to select each setting mode and setting display. The copy mode setting is indicated with the following lamps as shown below. 3. Change the setting with the value up-down key and press the START key, and a copy will be made with the entered set value. 4. Press the clear key to store the set value and exit the simulation. Copy mode AE mode TEXT mode PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) TS mode (AE) Display lamp AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp TEXT mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp

Relationship between the displayed values and the GAMMA ADJUST register AE TEXT PHOTO T/S Exp1 24 24 24 24 Exp2 12 12 12 12 Exp3 0 0 0 0 Exp4 +12 +12 +12 +12 Exp5 +24 +24 +24 +24

The value displayed after execution of this simulation can be set in the range of 0 99 with 50 as the center value. When the text mode set value is Gat3, for example, the GAMMA ADJUST register value set at Exp1 is: Text Exp1 = Gat3 50 24 When 40 is set to Gat3, Text Exp1 = 40 50 24 = 34 Then set the GAMMA ADJUST register set value to 34. Perform the same procedure for each mode and each Exp. The above table may subject to change. For the gradient, there is a similar table, though not specified here. The value set with SIM 46, however, is not reflected. The AE mode Exp selection is not specified, but corresponds to the grades for AE exposure selection in the former models. 12 FAX density overall adjustment Used to set the normal mode density setup value added with each FAX resolution mode correction value to each FAX resolution mode collectively. (Operating procedure) When this simulation is executed, warming up and shading are performed and the currently set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50) Change the set value with the value up-down key and press the PRINT switch. The entered value is stored and the simulation is terminated. During this mode, the resolution mode cannot be selected. The range of values dispalyed after execution of this simulation is 0 - 99 with 50 as the center. when reading FAX, the AE density can be selected in three levels (Dark, Normal, Light). However, in this mode, copying is made in Normal. (There is no manual setup in reading FAX.) 13 FAX density adjustment (Standard mode) Used to set the density set value in the normal mode individually. (Operating procedure) Same as the FAX density overall adjustment.

9 9

AR-F152

Main code 46

Sub code 14

Content FAX density adjustment (Fine mode) Used to set the denisty set value in the small character mode individually. (Operating procedure) Same as the FAX density overall adjustment. Since, however, the small character mode has the Text document mode and the Photo document mode, changeover can be made with the copy mode select key and the set value of the selected mode is displayed on the copy quantity display. The copy mode setup is made as shown below. Mode Text document mode Photo document mode Display lamp AE mode lamp Photo mode lamp

15

FAX density adjustment (Super Fine mode) Used to set the density set value in the fine mode individually. (Operating procedure) Same as the FAX density overall adjustment. table setup When this simulation is executed, the currently set gamma table code number is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to your desired gamma table and press the PRINT switch, and the setup will be changed. Code number 1 2 table Japan EX Japan

19

48

01

Front/rear scan direction (Outline) (1) Front/rear scanning direction magnification ratio auto correction: (Performed by changing the set value of ZOOM DATA register for asic.) The width of the reference line marked on the shading correction plate is scanned to perform the front/rear direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically. (Performed by changing the set value of ZOOM DATA register for ASIC.) (2) Front/rear scanning direction magnification ratio manual correction: Used to set the front/rear (main scanning) direction magnification ratio by key operations. (Performed by changing the set value of ZOOM DATA register for ASIC.) (3) Scanning direction magnification ratio correction: The scanning direction magnification ratio in the OC mode is set by key operations. (Performed by changing the scanning speed.) (4) SPF mode scanning direction magnification ratio correction: The scanning direction magnification ratio in the OC mode is set by key operations. (Performed by changing the scanning speed.) (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50) 2. When the copy mode select key is pressed, the setting mode and the setting display are changed sequentially. The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as follows: 3. In the front/rear scanning direction adjustment, when the START key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and the width of the reference line is read and the correction value is calculated and displayed and the value is stored. In the case of the manual adjustment, enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the START key. Then the entered value is stored and a copy is made. (An increase of 1 in the set value corresponds to an increase of 0.1mm.) 4. Press the clear key to store the set value and exit the simulation. Adjustment mode Front/rear direction magnification ratio auto correction Front/rear direction magnification ratio manual correction Scanning direction magnification ratio correction SPF mode scanning direction magnification ratio correction In the front-rear direction magnification ratio correction: (1) The result of calculation of the scan correction value is 5% or less, - - is displayed. (Cause) The white plate reference position error or the lens unit installing error (2) In case of a scanning error of the reference line, the JAM lamp is turned on. (Cause) CCD error or no white plate ) If the automatic correction of magnification ratio does not work properly, adjust and correct manually. Lamps ON AE lamp TEXT lamp PHOTO lamp AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamps

9 10

AR-F152

Main code 50

Sub code 01

Content Lead edge image position adjustment + Paper lead edge/rear edge void adjustment (Outline) This adjustment is used to adjust the copy image position and lead edge/rear edge void amount on the copy paper by adjusting the image scan start position and the print start position (resist roller ON timing) at 100%. (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50) 2. When the copy mode select key is pressed, each setting mode and the display are changed. The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as shown in the table below. 3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the start key. The set value is stored and a copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is shifted by 0.1 mm.) 4. When the clear key is pressed, the set value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated. Adjustment mode Print start position (Main cassette) Print start position (2nd cassette) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void quantity Image scan start position Image rear edge void quantity SPF image scan start position (Adjustment method) 1. Set the print start position (A: AE ON), the lead edge void amount (B: TEXT ON), the scanning start position (C: PHOTO ON) to zero and make a copy of a scale at 100%. 2. Measure the image loss R (mm) of the scale. Set as C = 10 R (mm). (Example: Set to 30.) When C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1 mm. (Default: 5) 3. Measure the distance H (mm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position. Set as A = 10 R (mm). (Example: Set to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is shifted toward the paper lead edge by 1 mm. (Default: 50) 4. Set the lead edge void amount as B = 50 (2.5 mm). (Default: 50) When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is increased by about 1 mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount becomes zero.) 6 The SPF adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF image scan start position immediately after turning on the power.
(Example) Distance from the paper lead edge to the image H = 5mm Image loss R = 3mm

Lighting lamps AE, Main cassette lamps AE, 2nd lamps AE, Manual feed lamps TEXT lamp PHOTO lamp AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamps AE, TEXT lamps

10

Paper center offset + OC/Document center offset + SPF document center offset (Outline) The center offset position of copy image on the copy paper and that of document scan are adjusted by adjusting the scan left margin of ASIC and the print left margin register set value. (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. 2. For a machine with a multi manual paper feed unit installed, when the copy mode select key is pressed, each set mode and display are changed. For a machine with a single manual paper feed unit installed, when the copy mode select key is pressed, each set mode and display are changed. 6 Machine with a multi manual paper feed unit Adjustment mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) OC/Document center offset SPF/Document center offset AE, AE, AE, AE, AE, Display lamp main cassette lamp 2nd cassette lamp Manual paper feed lamp TEXT lamp TEXT, PHOTO lamp

9 11

AR-F152

Main code 50

Sub code 10 6 Machine with a single manual paper feed unit Adjustment mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) OC/Document center offset SPF/Document center offset 18

Content

Display lamp AE, Main cassette lamp AE lamp (Blinking) AE, TEXT lamp AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp

Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy When this simulation is executed, the currently set correction value is displayed. Enter the desired correction value with the 10-key and press the print key. The entered value is stored. (The correction value ranges from 1 to 99. 0 or 50 for zero correction.) Front print in the S-D mode and even page print in the D-S mode are performed with reverse memory operation from the rear of the original. When, therefore, the print position adjustment of the output image is required, perform the adjustment as follows: The image direction in reverse memory copy is shown in Fig. 1. When the original scanning is made in the arrow direction, output images are printed from the rear edge of scanning. If, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is in the rear and use this simulation to change the simulation set value so that the lead edge of print images comes in the proper position. Printing is started at the print start position and executed from the final memory image data to the head data. By changing the position of the end data stored in memory with the simulation set value, the image lead edge position is adjusted and the read edge position of scanning is changed. Therefore, the end position of scanning is changed by the simulation set value to change the position of the end data stored in memory. The image lead edge is adjusted in this manner.
Original transport direction Lead edge of scanning Paper transport direction Print lead edge Lead edge void (1) Print start position

End position of scanning (Default: Scan cut by void(1)) Rear edge void Print rear edge Rear edge of scanning Scanning direction

19

Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment Used to adjust the rear edge void in duplex copy. (Operating procedure) When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed in 2 digits. When the copy mode select key is pressed, the set mode and the display are switched sequentially. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the print key, and the entered value is stored and a copy is made. When the clear key is pressed, the entered value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated. (When the set value is increased by 1, the void is increased by about 0.1mm.) Adjustment mode Image cut rear edge void (RSPF) Paper rear edge void Lamp ON AE lamp TEXT lamp

9 12

AR-F152

Main code 51

Sub code 02

Content Resist quantity adjustment Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the copier resist roller and the RSPF resist roller. (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. 2. In a machine with the multi paper feed unit installed, press the copy mode select key, and each setting mode and display are changed sequentially. In a machine with the single paper feed unit installed, press the copy mode select key, and each setting mode and display are changed sequentially. The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as follows: 3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the SORT key. Then the set value is stored and a copy is made. 4. Press the clear key to store the set value and exit the simulation. Machine with the multi manual paper feed Adjustment mode Main cassette paper feed 2nd cassette paper feed Manual paper feed RSPF document feed (front) RSPF document feed (back) Duplex back Machine with the single manual paper feed Adjustment mode Main cassette paper feed Manual paper feed RSPF document feed (front) RSPF document feed (back) Duplex back Display lamp AE, Main cassette lamp AE blinking (Main cassette lamp ON) AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp AE, TEXT lamp TEXT, PHOTO lamp Display lamp AE, Main cassette lamp AE, 2nd cassette lamp AE, Manual paper feed lamp AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp AE, TEXT lamp TEXT, PHOTO lamp

06

SPF exposure correction (Outline) The SPF exposure correction amount is adjusted by adjusting the change in Vref voltage for the OC mode. (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the start key. The entered value is stored and a copy is made. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the D/A output is changed by +1 digit (dark) for OC exposure. When it is changed by 1, the output is changed by 1 digit (light). 3. When the clear key is pressed, the entered value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated.

61

03

Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check) (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30 sec. At that time, the Zoom lamp is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected. Shading check (Outline) Used to display the detection level of the white plate for shading. (Vref of AD conversion IC is fixed.) (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and Vref+ voltage of AD conversion IC is set to 4.5V and Vref- voltage to 0.5V, and the copy lamp is lighted. This state is kept for 10 sec, and the level of one pixel at the center is detected every second to display on the value display section. Self print only with the engine (1 by 2 mode) (Outline) Used to print in the 1 by 2 mode by ignoring the state of the optical system. (Operation/Procedure) 1. When this simulation is executed, warming up is made and the ready lamp is lighted. 2. Select with the cassette select key and press the start key. Paper is fed from the selected cassette and printing is performed. In the 1 by 2 mode, one line is printed and two lines are not printed.

63

01

64

9 13

AR-F152 Main code 66 67 Sub code None 14 Content Simulation on the FAX panel (For details, refer to the FAX simulation.) PCL PWB program download Used to download the control program for PCL PWB. (Operating procedure) 1. Download procedure 1) Enter the simulation code, and the Ready LED will light up and the On-line LED will go off. 2) Press the PRINT switch, and the Ready LED will go off and the Flash ROM data will be deleted. 3) After completion of deletion, the On-line LED lights up. 4) Get your PC into the DOS mode and execute "COPY /Bxxx.BIN LPT1", and downloading will be started and the On-line LED will blink. 5) After completion of downloading, execute SUM check. If there is no problem, the On-line LED will go off and the Ready LED will light up. If there is any problem, "F9-10:PCL PWB trouble" is displayed. 6) Turn OFF/ON the power. 2. In case of a fail in downloading, turn OFF/ON the power and perform procedure 1. 3. 1) 2) 3) Items required for Flash downloading PC Parallel cable Program data file

3. FAX simulations (AR-F152 only)

A. Entering the FAX simulation mode
There are following two ways of entering the Fax simulation mode. They differ only in the key sequence and the operations of the simulation are the same in either mode. For key operations in the FAX simulation mode, use the LCD display and the FAX panel. During Fax operations, the Fax simulation cannot be entered. (1) From the FAX panel Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. Press ENTER. Press / proper times. Press ENTER. Procedure in each mode Procedure Position Fax Panel Fax Panel Fax Panel Fax Panel Fax Panel Operation ROM version is displayed on the LCD. FAX enters the simulation mode. The machine is in the normal display. Each mode name is displayed on the LCD sequentially. The mode is determined. Operations in each mode

Instead of above procedures 3 and 4, press the code (2 digits) of the target mode to enter the mode directly. (2) From the COPIER panel Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Clear, Exposure, Clear, Exposure. Enter the main code of 66 with 10Up/1Up keys. Press START key. Press / proper times. Press ENTER. Procedure in each mode Procedure Position Copier Panel Copier Panel Copier Panel Fax Panel Fax Panel Fax Panel Waiting for simulation code. FAX is in the normal display. 66 is displayed on 7SEG LED. The machine exits the simulation mode, and the FAX enters the simulation mode. Each mode name is displayed on the LCD sequentially. The mode is determined. Operations in each mode Operation

Instead of above procedures 4 and 5, press the code number (2 digits) of the target mode to enter the mode directly.

B. List of functions
Mode # 01 Mode Soft switch setting mode Soft switch clear mode (Only the setup is cleared.) Details of functions This mode is used to change the soft switch setup. The available soft switches are SW1 to SW30. The contents of soft switches are backed up. For details of soft switches, refer to Software Switch for FAX. This mode is used to reset the soft switch setup (including the user option setup) to the default. Since, however, some of soft switches have the adjustment values, the area for the adjustment values is excluded from the targets. 9 14 LCD display (Mode name) 01:SOFT SWITCH

02

02:SOFT SW CLEAR

AR-F152 03 ROM & RAM check mode This mode is used to perform ROM check sum and RAM read/write test. The result is shown with the buzzer and the LCD. No error: NO ERROR/ No buzzer ROM error : ROM ERROR / Buzzer once RAM error : RAM ERROR / Buzzer twice This mode is used to send various signals to the line. The FAX signal is sent in the level set with the soft switch. There are the following kinds of signals: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 10 Image memory clear mode (Only the image data is cleared.) Dial test / adjustment mode (Pulse 10 pps) No signal ( OFF HOOK state) DTMF 14400 bps (V.17) 12000 bps (V.17) 9600 bps (V.17) 7200 bps (V.17) 9600 bps (V.29) 7200 bps (V.29) 4800 bps (V27ter) 2400 bps (V27ter) 300 bps (FLAG) 2100 Hz (CED) 1100 Hz (CNG) (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,#) (00000000b, 11111111b, (00000000b, 11111111b, (00000000b, 11111111b, (00000000b, 11111111b, (00000000b, 11111111b, (00000000b, 11111111b, (00000000b, 11111111b, (00000000b, 11111111b, (00000000b, 11111111b, 03:ROM/RAM CHECK

04

Signal send mode

04:SIGNAL SEND

01010101b) 01010101b) 01010101b) 01010101b) 01010101b) 01010101b) 01010101b) 01010101b) 01010101b)

This mode is used to clear the image data memory (DRAM).

10:IMAGE MEM CLEAR

14

This mode is used to dial in dial pulse (10PPS) and to set the pulse make ratio adjustment value. The range of make ratio variable range: -8% +7% The setup is reflected on the adjustment value area of the soft switch. The dialed number is fixed to 1590. This mode is used to dial with DTMF. The number to be dialed is fixed to 1234567890#. This mode is used to print the report on the current soft switch setup. This mode is used to check the keys and the LED on the FAX panel. When any key on the FAX panel other than the STOP key is pressed, the name of the pressed key is displayed on the LCD. The LEDs on the FAX panel are lighted one by one sequentially. When any change is made on a sensor in the SPF section, the sensor name as well as its ON/OFF status is displayed on the LCD. This mode is used to detect signals in the line, and the detected signal name is displayed on the LCD. The signals to be detected are CNG, DTMF, and silent. The detection conditions conform to the soft switch setup. This mode is used to specify the other party FAX numbers registered in the onetouch/speed dial, with which communication errors occur frequently due to poor line conditions To the specified parties, the max. transmission speed is compulsorily reduced to stabilize the communication line. The speed is available in 9600BPS and 4800BPS.

14:DIAL TEST 10 PPS

16 21 42

Dial test mode (Tone) Print out soft switch mode FAX Panel check mode

16:DIAL TEST TONE 21:PRINT SOFT SW 42:FAX PANEL TEST

43

Signal detect mode

43:SIG. DETECT

44

Long distance comm. Select mode

44:LONG DIST COMM

C. Operating procedures in each mode

(1) Soft SW change method Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. Press ENTER. Press 0, 1. Enter the SW No. (2 digits) to be changed. Press / to shift the cursor to the bit to be changed. (The left edge is Bit No. 1.) LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) SW # = SW # = 10 SW10 = 00010101 bit # = 12345678 Operation

9 15

AR-F152 6 7 Press FUNCTION to highlight the bit in the cursor position. Press ENTER to register. SW10 = 10010101 bit # = 12345678 SW # = Return to Step 3. Press STOP to exit from the mode.

(2) Soft switch clear mode Procedure 1 2 3 4 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. Press ENTER. Press 0, 2. Press 1. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 02:SOFT SW CLEAR 1:OK 2:CANCEL DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) The soft switches setup is reset to the default, and this mode is terminated. Operation

(3) ROM & RAM check mode Procedure 1 2 3 4 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. Press ENTER. Press 0, 3. (Normal case) (RAM error) (ROM error) (4) Signal send mode Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. Press ENTER. Press 0, 4. Press or repeatedly to select the target signal. When the target signal is displayed, press ENTER. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 04:SIGNAL SEND SELECT SIGNAL <signal type> PRESS ENTER KEY For <signal type>, refer to TABLE-3. mode mode mode mode 1:NO SIGNAL Press STOP. (To terminate this mode) Press STOP. 2:DTMF DTMF # = Press any NUM key(0 9) or or #. Press STOP. (To continue) Go to 21. (To change the signal kind) Press STOP. (To terminate this mode) Press STOP twice. 04:SIGNAL SEND SELECT SIGNAL This mode is terminated. 2:DTMF DTMF # = <pressed key> 2:DTMF DTMF # = The DTMF signal corresponding to the pressed key is sent. 04:SIGNAL SEND SELECT SIGNAL # # # # = = = = 1 2 3 7 10 20 6 30 40 Operation LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 03:ROM/RAM CHECK ROM/RAM OK RAM ERROR ROM ERROR Two short beeps One short beep Operation

10 11 12 20 21 22 23

The relay is turned ON. The relay is turned OFF. NO SIGNAL mode is terminated. This mode is terminated.

9 16

AR-F152 Procedure 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Press or to select the target speed. When the target speed is displayed, press ENTER. Press or to select the target data to be sent. When the target data is displayed, press ENTER. Press STOP. (To change data only) Go to 33. (To change speed) Press STOP. (To change the signal kind) Press STOP twice. (To terminate this mode) Press STOP 3 times. 40 41 42 43 44 Press or to select the target frequency. When the target frequency is displayed, press ENTER. Press STOP. (To change the frequency only) Go to 41. (To change the signal kind) Press STOP. (To terminate this mode) Press STOP twice. TABLE-3: Signals in the Signal send mode MODE # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No signal DTMF V.17 V.29 V27ter FLAG Tone (CED/CNG) MENU DISPLAY 1:NO SIGNAL 2:DTMF 3:V.17 4:V.29 5:V27ter 6:FLAG 7:TONE 04:SIGNAL SEND SELECT SIGNAL This mode is terminated. 7:TONE SELECT FREQUENCY <signal freq.> PRESS ENTER KEY <signal freq.> 7:TONE SELECT FREQUENCY For <signal freq.>, refer to TABLE-4. The selected signal is sent. Signal send stop <signal type> SELECT SPEED 04:SIGNAL SEND SELECT SIGNAL This mode is terminated. LCD <signal type> SELECT SPEED <signal speed> PRESS ENTER KEY <signal speed> SELECT DATA <data> PRESS ENTER KEY <signal speed> <data> <signal speed> SELECT DATA For <data>, refer to TABLE-5. The selected signal is sent. Signal send stop For <signal speed>, refer to TABLE-4. Operation

TABLE-4: Speed/Frequency in the Signal send mode MODE # 3 4 5 6 7 MENU ITEM 1 1:V.17 14400BPS 1:V.29 9600BPS 1:V27ter 4800BPS 1:FLAG 300BPS 1:TONE 2100Hz 2:TONE 1100Hz MENU ITEM 2 2:V.17 12000BPS 2:V.29 7200BPS 2:V27ter 2400BPS MENU ITEM 3 3:V.17 9600BPS MENU ITEM 4 4:V.17 7200BPS

9 17

AR-F152 TABLE-5: Data which is sent in the Signal send mode MODE # 1 2 3 MENU (DATA) 00000000b 11111111b 01010101b DISPLAY 1:00000000b 2:11111111b 3:01010101b

(5) Image memory clear mode Procedure 1 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 10:IMAGE MEM CLEAR 1:OK 2:CANCEL DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) The image data are cleared and this mode is terminated. Operation

2 3 4

Press ENTER. Press 1, 0. Press 1.

(6) Dial test / adjustment mode (Pulse 10PPS) Procedure 1 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 14:DIAL TEST 10 PPS MAKE RATIO = ##% 14:DIAL TEST 10 PPS MAKE RATIO = ##% The current make ratio setup is displayed on ##. Press to decrease by 1%. Press to increase by 1%. 1590 is dialed. This mode is terminated. Operation

2 3 4 5 6

Press ENTER. Press 1, 4. Press or . (If there is no need to adjust, no need to press.) Press ENTER. (Adjustment/test end) Press STOP. (To continue adjustment/test) Return to 4.

(7) Dial test mode (Tone) Procedure 1 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 16:DIAL TEST TONE 1234567890# is dialed. This mode is terminated. Operation

2 3

Press ENTER. Press 1, 6.

(8) Print out soft switch mode Procedure 1 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 21:PRINT SOFT SW The soft switch list is printed. This mode is terminated. Operation

2 3

Press ENTER. Press 2, 1.

9 18

AR-F152 (9) Panel check mode Procedure 1 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 42:FAX PANEL TEST 42:FAX PANEL TEST <key name> The name of the pressed key is displayed in the lower stage of the LCD. This mode is terminated. Operation

2 3 4 5

Press ENTER. Press 4, 2. Press any key. Press STOP.

(10) Signal detect mode Procedure 1 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 43:SIG. DETECT 43:SIG. DETECT DTMF:<number> 43:SIG. DETECT CNG 43:SIG. DETECT QUIET This mode is terminated. Operation

2 3 4

Press ENTER. Press 4, 3. (When DTMF signal is detected) (When CNG signal is detected) (When QUIET signal is detected) (To terminate this mode) Press STOP.

(11) Long distance comm select mode Procedure 1 Press FUNCTION, 9, , 8, #, 7. LCD DIAGNOSTIC MODE ROM VERSION = <version> DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT MENU( ) 44:LONG DIST COMM 1:SET 2:CLEAR To terminate this mode, press STOP. To register 10 To cancel registration 20 SET ENTER # OR RAPID SELECT SPEED 1:9600BPS 2:4800BPS <Name or Number> STORED Operation

2 3 4 10 11 12 13 20 21 22

Press ENTER. Press 4, 4. Select the mode. Press 1. Press the desired one touch key or the speed dial (2 digits) to be registered. Select the speed. (Press 1 or 2.) Return to 3. Press 2. Press the desired one-touch key or speed dial (2 digits) to be canceled. Return to 3.

CLEAR ENTER # OR RAPID <Name or Number> CLEARED

Note: q One-touch keys and speed dials which are not registered cannot be designated. q When one-touch keys and speed dials which are registered are canceled, this setup is also canceled. q The group key and the polling key cannot be designated.

9 19

AR-F152

4. Software switch for FAX (AR-F152 only)

A. Software Switch List
This machine is provided with the following software switches for the use by a serviceman. The setup items of SW21 and later correspond to user setup one-to-one. Since SW17 20 are assigned to adjustment values, they are not cleared by Memory Clear. SW No. 1 Bit No. 1 ITEM 300dpi reception enable Soft SW setting and function Used to set enable/disable of 300 300dpi reception. 1 : Enable 2 200 400dpi reception enable 0 : Disable 1 Factory Setting 0

Used to set enable/disable of 200 400dpi reception. 1 : Enable 0 : Disable

3 4 5

Max. modem speed in reception

Used to limit the max. reception speed of Modem to 14400bps, 12000bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps. Bit No. 3 4 5 14400 BPS 1 1 12000 BPS 1 0 9600 BPS 0 1 1 7200 BPS 0 1 0 4800 BPS 0 0 1 2400 BPS 0 0 0

1 1 0

6 7 8

Max. modem speed in sending

Used to limit the max. sending speed of Modem to 14400bps, 12000bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps. Bit No. 6 7 8 14400 BPS 1 1 12000 BPS 1 0 9600 BPS 0 1 1 7200 BPS 0 1 0 4800 BPS 0 0 1 2400 BPS 0 0 0

1 1 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Silent detection threshold value

Used to set the threshold value of silent detection in the answering and recording mode. Threshold = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + 1 Bit4 Factory setting = 8

1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

Silent detection start time

Used to set the silent detection start time in the answering and recording mode. The time set with this switch is that from connection of the line to silent detection start. TIME = 8 Bit5 + 4 Bit6 + 2 Bit7 + 1 Bit8 sec Factory setting = 8 0 + 4 1 + 2 0 + 1 1 = 5 sec

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CNG detection threshold value (AUTO, MANUAL mode)

Used to set the threshold value of CNG signal detection. Threshold = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + 1 Bit4 Factory setting = 7

0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

CNG detection threshold value (A. M. mode Type 2)

Used to set the threshold value of CNG signal detection in the A.M. mode when SW4-8 is set to Type 2. Threshold = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + 1 Bit4 Factory setting = 3

9 20

AR-F152 SW No. 4 Bit No. 1 2 ITEM Silent detection end time Soft SW setting and function Used to set the silent detection end time in the answering and recording mode. The time set with this switch is that from the last call sound to the silent detection end. Bit No. 1 2 3 4 Number of times of CNG detection No limit 1 1 60sec 1 0 45sec 0 1 30sec 0 0 1 0 Factory Setting 0 1

Used to set the required number of times of CNG detection for recognition of CNG signal one time. Number of times = 2 Bit5 + 1 Bit6 + 1 Factory setting = 2 1 + 1 0 + 1 = 3 times

5 6 7 8

Reserved Reserved Reserved A.M. mode signal detection filter Used to select the CNG signal detection filter in the answering and recording mode. 1: Type 2 0: Type 1 Similar to SW3-5, -6, -7, and -8. Same as the others. Similar to SW3-1, -2, 3, and -4.

0 0 0 0

Max. reception length

Used to set or not to set the max. reception length of FAX documents. When this function is enabled, a reception length of 1.5m or above is treated as a communication error. 1 : No limit 0 : 1.5 m

2 3 4 5

Reserved Reserved Line monitor When this function is enabled, the sound of the line under FAX session can be heard. Bit No. 4 5 Always ON 1 Until response 0 1 OFF 0 0

0 0 0 0

Protocol monitor (LCD)

When this function is enabled, the signal name under FAX session is displayed on the LCD in real time. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

7 8

Protocol monitor (Report)

When this function is enabled, the detailed report on communication is provided after completion of FAX sending or reception. Bit No. 7 8 Always ON 1 Error Only 0 1 OFF 0 0

0 0

1 2 3 4

Signal send level

This mode is used to set the FAX signal send level. The effective set range is 1 dBm to 16 dBm. The values are mere estimation figures because they are affected by DAA. LEVEL = 8 Bit1 4 Bit2 2 Bit3 0 Bit4 1 dBm Factory setting = 9 dBm (Set for each destination) (When modem speed 7200 bps : If setting is 1 or 2 dBm , the level is forced to 3 dBm.)

1 0 0 0

5 6 7

Reserved Reserved Dial tone detection Used to set ON/OFF of dial tone detection before dialing for FAX sending. When this function is set to ON, dialing is started after detection of the dial tone. When this function is set to OFF, dialing is started after the set time of Interval between OFF-HOOK and dial send regardless of dial tone detection. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

0 0 1

9 21

AR-F152 SW No. 6 Bit No. 8 ITEM Busy tone detection Soft SW setting and function Used to set ON/OFF of busy tone detection. When this function is set to ON, if busy tone is detected, transmission is interrupted and the machine enters the recall mode. 1 : ON 7 1 2 3 4 Reception sensitivity offset 0 : OFF 0 0 0 0 Factory Setting 1

Used to set the FAX signal reception level offset. The set range is 8dBm to +7dBm. The values are mere estimation figures because they are affected by DAA. When Auto reception sensitivity adjustment is set to Enable, this setup is disabled. Sensitivity offset = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + Bit4 dBm Factory setting = 0 dBm

Auto reception sensitivity adjustment

When this function is set to Enable, the Modem automatically adjusts the received signal gain. 1 : Enable 0 : Disable

6 7

Transmission Line Equalizer

Used to select the frequency characteristics in the signal send level. This function is provided to absorb the difference in frequency characteristics between lines. When communication errors occur frequently, another equalizer must be selected. Gain (dB) for 2000Hz Frequency 500 1000 1500 2500 3000 Bit No. 6 7 None 0 0 0 0 0 None 0 0 Equalizer 1 +1.2 0.4 0.4 +0.7 +2.5 Equalizer 2 1.0 1.1 0.6 +0.9 +2.5 Equalizer 2 1 0 Equalizer 3 1.5 4.1 3.6 +2.4 +4.9 Equalizer 3 1 1

0 1

Equalizer 1 0 1

8 8 1

Reserved Non-modulation carrier send in V.29 Non-modulation carriers are not required for V.29 Modem transmission in ITU-TS standards. However, non-modulation carriers can be sent in advance to image signals. This function is effective to avoid communication troubles due to echoes in oversea communication. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

0 0

CED tone signal interval

Used to set the time interval between the CED signal and the NSF signal. This function is effective to avoid communication troubles due to echoes in oversea communication. 1 : 500 msec 0 : 75 msec

Communication error process when receiving RTN

Used to set the communication error process for received RTN when there is an error in transmitted image data and RTN is returned. 1 : Not transmission error 0 : Transmission error

NSF receive acknowledge

Used to select between DIS signal recognition at 2-time reception of DIS signal and DIS signal recognition at DIS signal reception after NSF signal. This function is effective to avoid communication troubles due to echoes in oversea communication. 1 : Twice 0 : Once for NSF reception, Twice for DIS reception

9 22

AR-F152 SW No. 8 Bit No. 5 ITEM EOL detection timer Soft SW setting and function Used to set the EOL (End of Life) detection time to 25sec or 13sec. This function is effective to avoid a communication error due to long EOL of certain models. 1 : 25 sec 6 7 8 Reserved Reserved ECM Used to set ON/OFF of ECM. 1 : ON 9 1 2 Interval between OFF-HOOK and dial send 0 : OFF 1 1 0 : 13 sec 0 0 1 Factory Setting 0

Used to set the delay from OFF-HOOK when starting dialing to actual send start of the dial signal. If the dial tone detection function is enabled, this setup is ignored. Bit No. 1 2 0.5sec 0 0 1sec 0 1 2sec 1 0 3sec 1 1

3 4 5 6 7 8 10 1 2

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FAST Used to set Enable/Disable of RMS (FAST) function. 1 : Enable 0 : Disable

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 4

Reserved Basic resolution Used to select the basic resolution for scanning and printing. 1 : Inch series 0 : Metric series

1 0

5 6 7 8

Reserved Language Used to select the language displayed on the LCD and the report. The correspondence between language N and the actual language differs depending on the destination. For North America Bit No. 6 7 8 Language 1 0 0 0 Language 1 American English Language 2 0 0 1 Language 2 French Language 3 Spanish

0 0 0 0

Language 3 0 1 0

Reserved 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

9 23

AR-F152 SW No. 11 Bit No. 1 Header ITEM Soft SW setting and function Used to set the header attachment to the transmitting document. 1 : Not attached 2 Header in data transfer 0 : Attached 0 Factory Setting 0

Used to set the header attachment to the transferring document. 1 : Not attached 0 : Attached

Training (EQM) threshold value

Used to select the threshold value to judge Success/Failure of training in reception of training. 1 : Easy to fall back 0 : Normal

4 5 6 7

Reserved Non ECM error judgement threshold value Bit 5, 6, 7 000 001 010 011 100 101 RTP 32 16 12 8 6 4 RTN 64 32 24 16 12 8

0 0 1 0

8 12 1 2 3 4 5

Reserved Activity Report Auto Listing time Used to set the start time of Activity Report. Setup is made in the unit of one hour, and setup of minutes cannot be made. Print start time = Bit1 16 + Bit2 8 + Bit3 4 + Bit4 2 + Bit5 hour 00 min Set range = 0 23 Factory Setting = 00:00 Reserved Reserved Reserved Auto recall in direct send Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Effective compression system in reception Bit No. 7 8 MH, MR, MMR 0 0 MH, MR 0 1 MH, MMR 1 0 MH 1 1 1 : Enable 0 : Disable

0 0 0 0 0 0

6 7 8 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9 24

AR-F152 SW No. 15 Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved RING signal frequency check Used to select the allowable frequency range of RING signal. Used to perform a communication test by using a simple switchboard in production process. 1 : To be checked 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Pulse dial signal make ratio adjustment (10PPS) Used to adjust the make ratio of 10PPS pulse dial signal. The set range is 8% to +7%. Offset = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + 1 Bit4 % Factory setting = 0 % Reserved 0 : Not to be checked 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

9 25

AR-F152 SW No. 21 Bit No. 1 2 ITEM Record paper size Soft SW setting and function Used to set the reception document size and the report output paper size. When set to Auto, the paper size is automatically selected according to the data size and the reduction ratio in reception. Bit No. 1 2 3 Picture quality priority selection Letter 0 0 Legal 0 1 A4 1 0 AUTO 1 1 0 Factory Setting 1 1

Used to set the default resolution in sending. 1 : Fine 0 : Standard

4 5 6 7 8 22 1 2 3 4

Reserved Number of reception start calls Used to set the number of calls before reception in the auto reception mode. The set range is 0 to 9 times. Number = 8 Bit5 + 4 Bit6 + 2 Bit7 + 1 Bit8 rings Set range : 0 9 Number of auto reception select Used to set the number of calls before reception in the manual reception mode. This setup is used as a backup function when the external telephone does not respond. The set range is OFF and 1 to 9 times. Number = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + 1 Bit4 rings Set range : 0(= OFF), 1 9

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

5 6 7 8

Reserved Result list print Used to set the printing conditions of the result list after completion of communication. Bit No. 6 7 8 Number of recall times Always 0 0 0 Err/Tim 0 0 1 Send 0 1 0 Never 0 1 1 Error 1 0 0

0 0 0 1

23

1 2 3 4

Used to set the number of times of recalls when sending is not normally completed due to busy status of the other party or a communication error. The set range is OFF and 1 to 14 times. For some causes of the communication error, however, the number of times of recalls must be set to a smaller level. Recall Times = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + 1 Bit4 times Set range : 0(= OFF), 1 14

0 0 1 0

5 6 7 8

Recall interval

Used to set the recall interval when a transmission is not normally completed due to busy status of the other party or a communication error. The set range is 1 to 15 minutes. Recall Interval = 8 Bit5 + 4 Bit6 + 2 Bit7 + 1 Bit8 min Set range : 1 15

0 1 0 1

24

1 2 3 4

Remote select number

Used to select the first digit of the select request signal when selecting from the external telephone to FAX reception. The set range is 0 to 9. Number = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + 1 Bit4 Set range : 0 9

0 1 0 1

Remote reception

Used to set whether Remote select number + from an external telephone is detected and switched to FAX reception or not. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

FAX signal reception

Used to set whether CNG signal is detected during OFFHOOK and switched to FAX reception or not. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

9 26

AR-F152 SW No. 24 Bit No. 7 ITEM Auto cover paper Soft SW setting and function Used to set whether a cover is attached to the last page in every transmission or not. 1 : ON 8 25 1 2 3 Reserved Record list auto print Used to set the interval of automatic printing of the record list. Bit No. 1 2 3 Reserved Reduction ratio in reception Used to set the magnification ratio of printing received documents. When AUTO is selected, the ratio is automatically determined according to the received document size and the output paper. 1 : 100% 6 7 8 Reserved Communication end buzzer time Used to set the time of buzzer sound to notify the end of communication. Bit No. 7 8 26 1 2 3 Buzzer sound volume 3 Seconds 0 0 1 Second 0 1 No Beep 1 0 0 1 0 0 : AUTO 0 0 0 OFF 0 0 0 1 day 0 0 1 2 days 0 1 0 4 days 0 1 1 1 week 1 0 0 0 : OFF 0 0 0 0 Factory Setting 0

4 5

0 0

Used to set the sound volumes of all buzzers except for call ring. Bit No. 1 2 3 MAX 0 0 0 HIGH 0 0 1 MED 0 1 0 LOW 0 1 1 MIN 1 0 0 OFF 1 0 1

Key click sound

Used to set whether the click sound is made or not when pressing a key on the FAX panel. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

5 6 7

Incoming Ring Volume

Used to set the sound volume of call ring. Bit No. 5 6 7 MAX 0 0 0 HIGH 0 0 1 MED 0 1 0 LOW 0 1 1 MIN 1 0 0 OFF 1 0 1

0 1 0

8 27 1 2 3

Reserved Distinctive Ring Used to set the RING signal pattern to start FAX reception with Distinctive Ring. Bit No. 1 2 3 Reserved Footer Used to set ON/OFF of the footer attached under each page data when printing received documents. 1 : ON 0 : OFF 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 3 0 1 0 4 0 1 1 5 1 0 0 Standard 1 0 1 OFF 1 1 0

0 1 1 0

4 5

0 0

9 27

AR-F152 SW No. 27 Bit No. 6 7 Reserved Telephone line kind Used to select the kind of telephone line (tone or pulse). 1 : TONE 8 28 1 2 3 4 Reserved A.M. mode Silent detection time Used to set the silent detection time in the answering and recording mode. The set range is OFF and 1 to 10sec. Time = 8 Bit1 + 4 Bit2 + 2 Bit3 + 1 Bit4 sec Effective : 0(= OFF), 1 10 5 A.M. mode auto reception select Used to set whether FAX reception is started or not after 6 call rings if the answering function does not work for some reasons in the answering and recording mode. 1 : ON 6 Annoying FAX prevention function 0 : OFF 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 : PULSE ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting 0 Tone

Used to set ON/OFF of the annoying FAX prevention function. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

Polling function

Used to set whether one-touch key 20 is used as the polling key or not. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

8 29 1 2

Reserved Record paper size (Main Tray) Used to set the record paper size in the main tray. Bit No. 1 2 Reserved Record paper size (2nd Tray) Used to set the record paper size in the 2nd tray. Bit No. 4 5 Letter 0 0 Legal 0 1 A4 1 0 Other 1 1 Letter 0 0 Legal 0 1 A4 1 0 Other 1 1

0 0 0

3 4 5

0 0 0

6 7 8

Reserved Reserved Index print Used to set whether marking is made to the lead edge of paper or not to identify the job when printing the received data. 1 : ON 0 : OFF

0 0 1

30

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9 28

AR-F152

5. TROUBLE CODES
A. Trouble codes list
Main code E7 Sub code 01 Trouble content Duplex model memory setup error, memory not-detected error HSYNC not detected. CCD white level trouble CCD black level trouble Shading trouble (White correction) ASIC connection trouble Copy lamp disconnection trouble Abnormal output of laser Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. Return is not completed within the specified time. Detail of trouble The memory is not set properly or the memory capacity is not set to the duplex setup (6M). Cancel method: Set SIM 26-39 code number to 2. LSU (laser diode, reception element, APC circuit) trouble LSU drive circuit (ASIC) trouble CCD drive circuit (CCD PWB, ASIC harness) trouble Copy lamp lighting trouble (Copy lamp, invertor PWB) CCD drive circuit (CCD PWB, ASIC, harness) trouble Dirt on white plate for scanning white level Improper connection between CPU and ASIC (pattern cut, improper connection of lead pin) Copy lamp or copy lamp drive circuit (invertor PWB) trouble Copy lamp disconnection LSU (laser diode, reception element, APC circuit) trouble LSU drive circuit (ASIC) trouble When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn OFF. Or when the mirror base is fed for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn OFF. When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. When the main motor encoder pulse is not detected for 100msec. The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not return within a certain time (about 20sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation The fusing thermistor is open. The fusing temperature rises above 240C. The fusing temperature does not reach 185C within 27 sec of turning on the power, or the fusing temperature keeps at 140C. When the counter check sum value stored in the EEPROM is abnormal. When a communication trouble occurs with the EEPROM. Serial communication error when a communication trouble occurs with the CRUM IC. When a toner cartridge of different type is used. Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU. Occurs when the message header of the message format is other than F. Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power. Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU. Occurs when the odd number parity set with SMR (serial mode register) differs from the reception data. Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power. Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU Occurs when the next data reception is completed with RDRF (Receive Data Register Full) flag of SS (Reserial status register) set to 1. Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power. Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU. Occurs when the stop bit is 0. (The stop bit must be 1.) Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power. Occurs when time is out without response in data communication between the FAX board and the MCU. Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power. Communication trouble between the MCU and the FAX board or between the FAX board and the FAX panel Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connections.

E7 E7 E7 E7 E7 E7 E7

03 04 05 12 14 15 16

L1

00

L3

00

L4 L6 H2 H3 H4 U2 U2 U2 F2 F6

01 10 00 00 00 01 04 40 04 80

Main motor lock Polygon motor lock Thermistor open detection Heat roller abnormally high temperature Heat roller abnormally low temperature Counter sum check error EEPROM serial communication error CRUM IC Toner cartridge type error Communication trouble with FAX PWB (Protocol) Communication trouble with FAX PWB (Parity)

F6

81

F6

82

Communication trouble with FAX PWB (Overrun)

F6

84

Communication trouble with FAX PWB (Framing) Communication trouble with FAX PWB (Time-out) FAX PWB trouble

F6

88

F6

10

9 29

AR-F152

B. FAX Service Error Code Table

(1) LCD: FAX SERVICE ERROR(#)
Code # 1 RAM error 2 CTS error (Communication error) 3 Content ROM error Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. If the error is not canceled, check the ROM of the FAX PWB. Turn OFF/ON the power. If the error is not canceled, check the DRAM of the FAX PWB. Turn OFF/ON the power. If the error is not canceled, check connection between the FAX PWB and the MCU PWB. If no abnormality is found, check the FAX PWB and MCU PWB themselves., especially TXD, RXD, CTS, and RTS signals. Turn OFF/ON the power. If the error is not canceled, check the connector and the harness between the FAX PWB and the MCU PWB. If no abnormality is found, check the FAX PWB and MCU PWB themselves. Turn OFF/ON the power and execute FAX scanning to check the operation. If the error is not canceled. Check connection between the FAX PWB and the MCU PWB. If no abnormality is found, check the FAX PWB and MCU PWB themselves.

(2) Reception error

Code 0 Content The handshake signal is detected, but the signal includes an error. The handshake signal from the receiver is not recognized. (Error after reception of NSF/DIS) The handshake signal from the receiver is not recognized. (Error after reception of NSC/DTC) The handshake signal from the receiver is not recognized. (Error after reception of EOP) The handshake signal from the receiver is not recognized. (Error after reception of EOM) The handshake signal from the receiver is not recognized. (Error after reception of MPS) Not defined. An unexpected DCN is received. Error after reception of all pages (Error after reception of PPS-EOP) Error after changing the communication mode (Error after reception of PPS-EOM) Error after reception of a page (Error after reception of PPS-MPS/NULL) Not defined. Communication error after fallback during transmission (Error after reception of CTC) Error after reception of EOR & errors other than the above

Panel error

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Scan data error

Note: If some reception data is left in memory,, transfer the data with FUNCTION-0 and turn OFF the power.

C. Communication error code table

(1) Sending error
Code 0 Content The handshake signal is detected, but the signal includes an error. The handshake signal from the receiver is not recognized. (Error after reception of NSF/DIS) The line is disconnected during data transmission. The line is disconnected after fallback of training. (Error after reception of CFR) The line is disconnected during transmission of two or more pages. (Error after reception of MCF) Not defined. Error after reception of RTN/RTP An unexpected DCN is received. Resend is repeated by the specified times, but the error is not canceled. Not defined. Not defined. Not defined. Error after fallback during transmission (Error after reception of CTR) ERR is received, & errors other than the above.

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

9 30

AR-F152

[10] USER PROGRAM

The conditions of factory setting can be changed according to the use conditions.

Functions which can be set with the user program

Function Auto clear time Contents
q When a certain time is passed after completion of copying, this function returns to the initial state

Factory setting 60 sec

automatically. The time to reach the initial state can be set in the range of 30 sec to 120 sec by the unit of 30 sec. This function can be disabled.
q When the copier is left unused with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically reduced

Preheat

to about 40Wh/H ( Note). The time to start this function can be set in the range of 30 sec to 90 sec by the unit of 30 sec. This function cannot be disabled.
q When this function is operated, the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel lights up.

90 sec

To return to the initial state, press any key on the operation panel. (When the COPY button is pressed, a copy is made after returning to the initial state.)
q When the copier is left unused with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically reduced

Auto shut off timer

to about 18Wh/H ( Note). The time to start this function can be set in the range of 2 min to 120 min.
q When this function is operated, all the lamps except for the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel

5 min

turn off. To return to the initial state, press the COPY button. Stream feeding Auto shut off Only models with SPF.
q Used to set or cancel this function.

Cancel Set

Note: The power consumption values in preheat and auto shut off may be varied depending on the use conditions.

Setting the power save modes, auto clear time, and stream feeding mode
1) Press and hold down the light ( ) and dark ( ) keys simultaneously for more than 5 seconds until all the alarm indicators ( , , and ) blink and "- -" appears in the display. 2) Use the left copy quantity ( ) key to select a user program number (1: auto clear time, 2: preheat mode, 3: auto power shut-off timer, 4: stream feeding mode, 5: auto power shut-off mode). The selected number will blink in the left side of the display.

Function name Auto clear time Preheat Auto shut off timer Stream feeding Auto shut off

Function code 1 2 3 4V 5

[Cancel] If a wrong code is entered, press the clear key and enter the correct function code. SPF only

The remaining toner quantity is displayed by pressing the % key for 5 sec before entering a program code in the user simulation mode. 3) Press the print ( ) key. The entered program number will be steadily lit and the currently selected parameter number for the program will blink on the right side of the display. 4) Select the desired parameter using the right copy quantity ( ) key. The entered parameter number will blink on the right of the display. Function name Set code 0 (Cancel) 1 (30 sec) Auto clear time 2 (60 sec) 3 (90 sec) 4 (120 sec) 5 (10 sec) Preheat Function name Set code 0 (30 sec) 1 (60 sec) 2 (90 sec) Auto shut off timer Function name Set code 0 (2 min) 1 (5 min) 2 (15 min) 3 (30 min) 4 (60 min) 5 (120 min) Stream feeding Function name Set code 0 (Cancel) 1 (Setting) Auto shut off Function name Set code 0 (Cancel) 1 (Setting)

: Factory setting 5) Press the print ( ) key. The right-hand number in the display will be steadily lit and the entered value will be stored. Note: To change the setting or to set another mode, press the clear ( ) key. The copier will return to step 2). 6) Press the light ( ) or dark ( ) key to return to the normal copy mode.

10 1

AR-F152

[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table
!: Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.) Section Developer Developing DV blade DV side seal (F/R) Process peripheral Drum v Parts 25K v 50K v v v v v 75K v : Clean 100K v v v v v v: Replace 125 v : Adjust 6: Lubricate Remark

2. Maintenance display system

Life a. Remaining b. quantity check 1 Toner c. Remaining quantity LED Machine Life LED Developer Machine ON at 25K of the developer count. Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup. (If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.) Default: Not Stop Clear: SIM 24-06 Selection is available among 18K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1. Default: free Clear: SIM 20-1 Not stop. 6.5K Press and hold the density adjustment LIGHT key for more than 5 sec, and the machine will enter the user program mode. Press and hold the "%" key for more than 5 sec, and the remaining quantity will be displayed on the copy quantity display in one of the following levels: (Remaining quantity display levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, LO) Press the density adjustment LIGHT key to cancel. EMPTY Flash Stop 25K

NEAR EMPTY About 10% ON Operation allowed

Maintenance

LED Machine

1: Installation of a new toner cartridge allows to display the remaining quantity.

11 1

AR-F152

1. Block diagram

F-PUMA MCU PWB Overall block diagram

GDI MEMORY

A. Overall block diagram

Option

CN26 CN9 CN30

JITTER SYNC IC

CN16

SPF(AR-F152), R-SPF(AR-156) UNIT

SRAM
Toner Motor

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION

CCD CN15
Option GDI/USB UNIT FAX OPE PWB

Reference CN23 CN5

FAX PWB (AR-F152 Only) SPEAKER

AND

Printed Visual Data

LASER AND

LSU

Other Loads

ASIC
AND AND UART

Other Inputs
MHPS POD MMLD CRSM UNIT INTERLOCK SWITCH DVSEL SDOD CED2 RTH PPD1 MHPS TCS PPD2 CED1 PSW1 PSW2

MIRROR MOTOR

12 1
AND

MAIN MOTOR

VFM

RRS

CPFS1

CPU

Duplex Motor (AR-156 Only)

MPFS CN3
RESET IC

HL CN20

COPY LAMP

OPE PANEL

AC PWB 5V
EPROM
12V 24V 5V 3.3V GND FM MC BIAS TC GRIDL

CN3
HLOUT PR

SRAM
EEPROM

CN 902 CRU Reset Switch

MCU PWB

Power UNIT AC INPUT

High Voltage Control Unit

AR-F152 MCU PWB UNIT

LASER UNIT (LSU) SDOD SPF UNIT CCD PWB
GDI/USB UNIT GDI MEMORY SPPD POLYGON MOTOR HSYNC

B. MCU PWB unit

FAX OPE PWB USB-IN CN15 CN31 CN30

CRSM UNIT

FAX PWB /FAXPRQ /VIDEO USB-EN /FAXACK /FAXCSPMRDY PMCLK-A S/H /PMD /LDEN USB-ON /FAXREQ etc.. CN23 GDI-IN /1284-EN SPID/SPUS SB4D /SRRC /SGS/SPFS CN26 CN16 etc.. CCDHI CCDLO etc.. IC104 IC110 IC109 CN17 IC8 IC105 IC8 IC106 IC111 IC16 CN17 IC105 IC103 IC106 IC3 IC103 IC105 /BIAS IC13 IC12 DVSEL

/SCANST /PRSTART /POFF CN5 /FRTS etc..

DV SENSOR

TRAY EMPTY DETECTOR

CN1

PAPER PAPER FEED CASSETTE1 SOLENOID

CN7

/CED1

DEVELOPING BIAS

PAPER WIDTH DETECTION

CN10

IC105 /CPFS1 IC3 PSW1 IC104

TRAY EMPTY DETECTOR

/CED2

PAPER PAPER FEED CASSETTE2 SOLENOID IC102 IC2 IC113 IC3 IC8 FTH IC113

CN6

/CPFS2
HIGH VOLTAGE CONTROL UNIT

GRID CONTROL
TRANSFER CHARGER MAIN CHARGER

PAPER WIDTH DETECTION

PSW2 IC10 ASIC (HG73CO25FD)

IC9 CPU (H8S/2350)

CN3

FW /PR

ELECTRIC SOURCE POWER RELAY HLOUT HEATER LAMP

THERMISTOR

12 2
IC3 IC105 IC113 CN27 MHPS
MIRROR MOTOR

IC105

PAPER MANUAL DETECTOR MFD CN12 PAPER PAPER FEED FEED /MPFS

SOLENOID

IC3

RESIST ROLLER SOLENOID

CN11

/RRS POD

IC105

IC103 IC109 IC101

5V(DSWS) CN4 24V(DSWS)

INTERLOCK

PAPER EXIT DETECTOR

CN22

INTERLOCK

RTH-IN IC3 IC2 IC103 CN13

PAPER DETECTOR2 (In FUSER UNIT)

IC8 IC106 IC108 IC103 IC12 CN28 CN17 TCS IC105

IC1 CN9

CN25 VFMOUT /VFMCNT /CL

TONER MOTOR COPY LAMP

CN14 PPD1

PSW KIN1 KIN2

MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR MAIN MOTOR

CN20 CN18 OP-CLK MMLD /MM OP-LATCH OP-DATA MAIN

MIRROR HOME POSITION SENSOR

CN21 TMa-O TMb-O

PPD2

DRST

KEY

TONER CONTROL SENSOR

VENCH RATION FAN MOTOR

PAPER DETECTOR1 (Near RESIST ROLLER)

OPE PWB

AR-F152

NEW PROCESS UNIT SENSOR

FAX PWB UNIT

FTXD FRTS
IC510 SCAN MEMORY 16Mbit DRAM

AR-F152

CN501 Image BUS IC506 I/F ASIC VSYNC Scan Date C N 6 0 1 MCU PWB SCDACK POFF READYPRSTART etc..

SOD LCD PWB SID SCK PANEL RESET IC505 LC8213

IC503 System controller NS FX200

C. FAX PWB unit (AR-F152 only)

RESET

LD BUS

PWOFF IC512 Image MEMORY 256kbit SRAM

IC507 CPU NS FX164

CPU BUS LCAS,UCAS 12V 5V 3.3V

IC601

IC504 Main MEMORY 16Mbit DRAM

READY FAXPRO FAXCS Print Date FAXACK FCTS 12V etc.. IC509 FAX ASIC IC508 PLL CGS410 IC513 IC514
IC515 Print Memory 16Mbit DRAM

5V 3.3V

C515 SUPER Capacitor RESET -12V

12 3

-5V

IC502 EPROM 8Mbit

LIU circuit primary side of the line

Capacitor On-hook detection

Modem circuit secondary side of the line Sigma-delta circuit IC606/IC605 Delta-sigma circuit IC606/IC516/IC607

IC501 Configuration RAM 64kbit SRAM

Line transformer

Relay
Ring detection Photo coupler Bypass circuit

Protection element

Telephone line

Relay
External telephone communication

Line jack CN502 (for US)

IC602 Clock IC NJM6355

DC load

BT501 Lithium Battery BUZON

Speaker circuit IC605/IC609/IC608

BZ1

C N 5 0 3

C N 5 0 1

SPEAKER

AR-F152

2. Circuit descriptions
A. Man PWB (MCU) (1) CPU signal table
PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 ZC /ASICINT Interruption level input Interruption level input (SPPD) USB-IN (MHPS) /CPU SYNC Interruption level input Input Interruption level input Interruption level input A20 Output A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output A0 A1 A2 A3 Output Output Output Output Signal code /CS1 /CS0 Input/output Output Output Operating Chip Select for SRAM Chip Select for EPROM D-GND D-GND 5V Address Bus (NC-pull up) Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus D-GND Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus 49 Address Bus Address Bus D-GND Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus (NC-pull up) D-GND Address Bus (NC-pull up) NC-pull up SPF Paper Pass Detector USB Connector-In Detect Mirror Home Position Sensor Horizontal Synchronous (from G/A) D-GND D-GND 65 Zero-cross signal Intterupt from G/A 66 67 68 FCTS Input 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 (OPDATA) FTXD FRTS FRXD (OP-CLK) TMON Output Output Output Input Output Output D15 55 56 D13 D14 53 54 D12 Data input/output Data input/output Data input/output Data input/output 51 52 D10 D11 50 D9 D8 48 D7 Data input/output Data input/output Data input/output Data input/output Data input/output Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus D-GND Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus 5V Data Signal for Operation Panel TXD for Additional Board RTS for Additional Board RXD for Additional Board Clock for Operation Panel Power Supply Signal for Toner Motor Driver IC D-GND CTS for Additional Board D-GND D-GND 46 47 D5 D6 44 45 D4 Data input/output Data input/output Data input/output 42 43 D2 D3 41 D1 PIN No. 39 40 D0 Data input/output Data input/output Data input/output Data input/output Signal code Input/output 5V Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus D-GND Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Operating

12 4

AR-F152 PIN No. 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 Signal code PSW KIN1 KIN2 TMCLK /TMEN /POFF PMCLK /PRSTART /SCANSP /SCANST HL WDTOVFRESInput/output Input Input Input Timer output Output Output Timer output Output Output Output Output (Timer output) Output Input Input Input Operating Print switch input Key input 1 Key input 2 Clock for Toner Motor On-Off Control for Toner Motor Power Off Signal for Additional Board Clock for Polygon Motor Printing Start Signal Scaning Stop Signal Scaning Start Signal On-Off Control for Heatrer Lamp Watchdog Timer 123 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 SIN1 SIN2 SIN3 Input Input Input Sensor input 1 Sensor input 2 Sensor input 3 RTH Analog input SCLK SDA Output Output /AS /RD /HWR /LWR SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 PR RRS Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output CPUCLK Output XTAL EXTAL Reset pull up pull up 5V Clock Clock D-GND System Clock for G/A 5V pull up Read Signal Write Signal (High Address) Write Signal (Low Address) Input select 3 Input select 2 Input select 1 Power relay control PR Resist roller solenoid RPC D-GND D-GND Clock Line for EEPROM Data Line for EEPROM A5V Analog Reference Voltage-A5V Fusing Thermister 125 126 127 128 DRST /CS2 Input Output Input 124 Input Input 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 DMT-3 DMT-2 DMT-1 DMT-0 MRMT3 MRMT2 MRMT1 MRMT0 Motor output Motor output Motor output Motor output Motor output Motor output Motor output Motor output DAL PIN No. 110 111 Signal code SIN4 DAH Input/output Input Analog output Analog output Operating Sensor input 4 Reference Voltage (High) for CCD Reference Voltage (Low) for CCD AN-GND D-GND Duplex Motor Excitement Duplex Motor Excitement Duplex Motor Excitement Duplex Motor Excitement Mirror Motor Excitement Mirror Motor Excitement Mirror Motor Excitement Mirror Motor Excitement CPU MODE SET <MODE 4> GND CPU MODE SET <MODE 4> GND CPU MODE SET <MODE 4> Vcc NC-pull up Drum reset detection Chip Select for ASIC

80

The signals which are hatched are added or revised to or from the AL-1000.

12 5

AR-F152

(2) ASIC (Signal table)

PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 Signal name /SCANSP /PRSTART /TMEN TMCLK 3.3V CPUAD7 CPUAD6 GND CPUAD5 CPUAD4 CPUAD3 CPUAD2 CPUAD1 /CPUSYNC /ASICINT /CS2 /RESET 5V GND 3.3V GND MDATA15 MDATA14 MDATA13 MDATA12 MDATA11 MDATA10 MDATA9 MDATA8 MDATA7 3.3V MDATA6 MDATA5 GND MDATA4 MDATA3 MDATA2 MDATA1 MDATA0 /RAS0 /RAS1 /RAS2 /RAS64 3.3V /RAS16 MAD0 IN IN IN IN Power IN IN Power IN IN IN IN IN OUT OUT IN IN Power Power Power Power IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT OUT DRAM control (for panther) DRAM (Reserved) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM control (for panther) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) RAS signal 0 of DRAM (page memory) RAS signal 1 of DRAM (page memory) RAS signal 2 of DRAM (page memory) (Reserved) DRAM DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) Data bus of DRAM (page memory) CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU RESET IC CPU address bus CPU address bus CPU address bus CPU address bus CPU address bus Horizontal synchronization signal Interruption request signal CPU chip select signal Reset signal CPU CPU CPU address bus CPU address bus IN/OUT Connected to CPU (I/O) CPU CPU CPU Description Scanner process interrupt signal Print start trigger signal Toner motor ON/OFF Toner motor reference clock

12 6

AR-F152 PIN No. 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 Signal name GND MAD1 MAD2 MAD3 MAD4 MAD5 MAD6 MAD7 MAD8 MAD9 3.3V MAD10 MAD11 GND /CAS0 /CAS1 /OE /WE OUTD0 OUTD1 OUTD2 OUTD3 3.3V OUTD4 OUTD5 GND OUTD6 OUTD7 OUTD8 OUTD9 OUTD10 OUTD11 OUTD12 OUTD13 OUTD14 OUTD15 /HSYNC /PCLPRD /PCLREQ /PCLACK /PCLCS 3.3V GND 5V GND /FAXPRD /FAXREQ /FAXACK 3.3V IN/OUT Power OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT OUT Power OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT OUT Power OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT IN IN Power Power Power Power IN OUT IN Power 12 7 FAX board FAX board FAX board Print video data (serial) from FAX board DREQ signal to FAX board ACK signal from FAX board FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus PCL, FAX board PCL board PCL board PCL board PCL board Transmission data 6 to expanded board Transmission data 7 to expanded board Transmission data 8 to expanded board Transmission data 9 to expanded board Transmission data 10 to expanded board Transmission data 11 to expanded board Transmission data 12 to expanded board Transmission data 13 to expanded board Transmission data 14 to expanded board Transmission data 15 to expanded board Horizontal sync signal with print area output only Print video data (serial) from PCL board DREQ signal to PCL board ACK signal from PCL board FAX board data bus FAX board data bus Transmission data 4 to expanded board Transmission data 5 to expanded board DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus FAX board data bus CAS signal of DRAM (page memory) CAS signal of DRAM (page memory) Read enable signal of DRAM (page memory) Write enable signal of DRAM (page memory) Transmission data 0 to expanded board Transmission data 1 to expanded board Transmission data 2 to expanded board Transmission data 3 to expanded board DRAM DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Address bus of DRAM (page memory) Connected to Description

AR-F152 PIN No. 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 Signal name /FAXCS /ESPRD GND /ESREQ /ESACK /ESCS PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 PARAD4 PARAD5 5V PARAD6 PARAD7 GND /REV INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB /ACK BUSY PE /FAULT 5V SLCT /TESTPIN0 GND PFCLK /TESTPIN1 /SYNCEN SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 5V SD15 SD16 GND SD17 SOE1 SWE1 SCS1 IN IN Power OUT IN IN IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT Power OUT IN IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT IN Power IN IN OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT OUT OUT OUT SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation Read enable line to SRAM before area separation Write enable line to SRAM before area separation Chip select line to SRAM before area separation SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Transmitter TEST PIN JITTER ADJUSTMENT IC SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) Write clock High: Normal Low: Test Jitter adjustment IC trigger signal Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation 1284 board connector TEST PIN /SLCTIN signal (IEEE1284 communication port) High: Normal Low: Test 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector ECP mode I/O select (LOW:P H) INIT signal (IEEE1284 communication port) /SLCTIN signal (IEEE1284 communication port) /AUTOFD signal (IEEE1284 communication port) /STB signal (IEEE1284 communication port) /ACK signal (IEEE1284 communication port) BUSY signal (IEEE1284 communication port) PE signal (IEEE1284 communication port) /FAULT signal (IEEE1284 communication port) 1284 board connector 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port) DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port) Electric sort board
(Reserved)

IN/OUT

Connected to FAX board Electric sort board

(Reserved)

Description OUTD bus enable signal H bus impedance HIGH state (Reserved)

(Reserved)

Electric sort board

(Reserved)

(Reserved)

Electric sort board

(Reserved)

(Reserved) DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port) DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port) DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port) DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port) DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port) DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)

1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector 1284 board connector

12 8

AR-F152 PIN No. 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 Signal name SOE0 SWE0 SCS0 SD00 SD01 5V SD02 SD03 GND SD04 SD05 SD06 SD07 SAD0 SAD1 SAD2 SAD3 SAD4 SAD5 SAD6 SAD7 GND SAD8 SAD9 SAD10 SAD11 SAD12 SAD13 /f1 /f2 /SH 5V RS SP GND CP BCLK IDIN0 IDIN1 IDIN2 IDIN3 IDIN4 IDIN5 IDIN6 IN/OUT OUT OUT OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT OUT Power OUT OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN IN CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB (AD conversion) CCD PWB (AD conversion) CCD PWB (AD conversion) CCD PWB (AD conversion) CCD PWB (AD conversion) CCD PWB (AD conversion) CCD PWB (AD conversion) A/D conversion IC latch clock CCD shield output latch signal Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion) Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion) Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion) Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion) Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion) Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion) Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion) CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD drive signal reset pulse CCD drive signal sampling hold pulse SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation CCD drive signal transfer clock (First phase) CCD drive signal transfer clock (Second phase) CCD drive signal shift pulse SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation Address line to SRAM before area separation SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Connected to SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) SRAM (separation) Description Read enable line to SRAM before area separation Write enable line to SRAM before area separation Chip select line to SRAM before area separation Data line to SRAM before are separation Data line to SRAM before are separation

12 9

AR-F152 PIN No. 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 Signal name 5V IDIN7 /SDCLK GND SFCLK TEST port 0 /SYNC /LD /LEND USB-EN 1284-EN PORTOUT26 3.3V PORTOUT25 PORTOUT24 GND SGS SRRC SPUS /READY OP-LATCH MRPS2 MRPS1 SPFS SMSEL 3.3V TC GRIDL GND MC BIASL BIASH BIAS CL VFMCNT VFM LDEN PMD 5V MM MPFS GND CPFS2 CPFS1 TM IN/OUT Power IN OUT Power IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT OUT Power OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT OUT Power OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Power OUT OUT Power OUT OUT OUT Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Second cassette paper feed solenoid control signal. Second cassette paper feed at HIGH. Cassette paper feed solenoid control signal. One-stage cassette paper feed at HIGH. Toner motor drive output (+) Tr array IC Tr array IC Main motor control signal. Main motor ON at HIGH. Manual paper feed solenoid control signal. Multi paper feed ON at HIGH. Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Main charger control signal. ON at HIGH. DV bias voltage control signal. ON at HIGH. DV bias voltage control signal. ON at HIGH. DV bias output control signal. ON at HIGH. Copy lamp control signal. ON at HIGH. Ventilation fan rotating speed control signal. Low speed at HIGH, high speed at LOW. Ventilation fan control signal. Fan ON at HIGH. Laser circuit control signal. Laser circuit ON at HIGH. Polygon motor control signal. Polygon motor ON at HIGH. Tr array IC Tr array IC Transfer charger control signal. ON at HIGH. Main charger grid control signal. ON at HIGH. Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC FAX PWB Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC Tr array IC SPF gate solenoid SPF resist roller solenoid SPF PU solenoid READY signal (Expansion PWB) Latch signal for operation circuit. Data latch at LOW. Mirror speed control signal. Mirror speed 2 at LOW. Mirror speed control signal. Mirror speed 1 at LOW. SPF paper feed solenoid SPF motor/Mirror motor select signal (Not used) (Not used) Transmitter AUTO SCAN TEST LSU LSU LSU GDI/USB PWB GDI/USB PWB CCD drive clock (48MHz), Also used as an internal clock. High: Normal Low: Test Horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNC) from LSU Laser drive signal Laser APC signal USB port enable signal 1284 port enable signal (Not used) CCD PWB (AD conversion) CHECK Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion) Effective image area signal Connected to Description

12 10

AR-F152 PIN No. 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 Signal name TM_ CPUD15 CPUD14 CPUD13 CPUD12 CPUD11 5V CPUD10 CPUD9 GND CPUD8 CPUD7 CPUD6 CPUD5 CPUD4 CPUD3 CPUD2 CPUD1 CPUD0 3.3V /CPUWR /CPURD GND CPUCLK GND TEST PORT1 /SCANST IN/OUT OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN IN Power IN Power IN IN AUTO SCAN TEST CPU (I/O) High: Normal Low: Test Scanner process start signal CPU CPU system clock CPU CPU CPU write signal CPU read signal CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU CPU CPU data bus CPU data bus Connected to Tr array IC CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Toner motor drive output () CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus Description

The signals which are hatched are added or revised to or from AL-1000.

(3) Expanded PWB interface section

The MCU PWB and the expanded PWB are connected by CN5 connector to make serial communication (UART). The FAX PWB uses signals in Table A, and the PCL PWB uses signals in Table B. Recognition of FAX PWB or PCL PWB: If /FREADY is LOW, the FAX PWB expansion is recognized. If /PREADY is LOW, the PCL PWB expansion is recognized.
PCL/FAX CN

CN5 1 R128 10J C141 (1-D4) /SCANST 18p (7-E1) (7-E1) /PREADY FTXD /PREADY FTXD /FRTS /SCLINE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F-RESET /HSYNC OUTD1 OUTD3 OUTD5 OUTD7 OUTD9 OUTD11 OUTD13 OUTD15 /PCLREQ /PCLCS /FAXREQ /FAXCS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 L3 SBO-02SAN L1 SBO-02SAN /POFF OUTD0 OUTD2 OUTD4 OUTD6 OUTD8 OUTD10 OUTD12 OUTD14 /PCLPRD /PCLACK /FAXPRD /FAXACK OUTD0 OUTD2 OUTD4 OUTD6 OUTD8 (5-E1) (5-E1) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) 18p C134 C135 C137 C143 18p 18p R132 10J /POFF (1-C1) /PRLINE /FPAGE /FREADY /READY FRXD /FCTS /PAGE (7-E2) R131 10J /READY FRXD /FCTS (7-E1) (7-D1) C140 C142 (5-A3) R130 10J /PRSTART (1-D2)

/FREADY (7-E2)

(7-E2)/FRTS

(1-E1) (5-E2) (5-E1) (5-E1) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2)

/F-RESET /HSYNC OUTD1 OUTD3 OUTD5 OUTD7 OUTD9 OUTD11 OUTD13 OUTD15 /PCLREQ /PCLCS /FAXREQ /FAXCS

OUTD10 (5-E2) OUTD12 (5-E2) OUTD14 (5-E2) /PCLPRD (5-E2) /PCLACK (5-E2) /FAXPRD (5-E2) /FAXACK (5-E2) L2

0.1u 12V

0.1u

0.1u

5V SBO-02SAN 3.3V

TX25-60P-23ST-H1

C118

C3

C119

C5

C117

C2

0.1u

47u 25V

0.1u

47u 16V

0.1u

47u 16V

12 11

AR-F152 Table A (Signals used in the FAX PWB) PIN No. (CN5) 3 6 7 12 13 14 21, 44 51 24 25 33 34 35 36 37 38 43 54 55 Signal name /SCLINE FTXD /FRTS /F-RESET /HSYNC OUTD1 OUTD15 /FAXREQ /FAXCS /PRLINE /FPAGE /FREADY /READY FRXD /FCTS /POFF /FAXPRD /FAXACK IN/OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT IN IN OUT IN IN OUT IN IN Descriptions Effective input image area Serial communication data Serial reception ready (Machine side) Reset signal Horizontal sync signal Data to the expanded PWB Data transfer REQ signal OUTD bus enable signal Effective print area Page data READY FAX PWB recognition signal READY signal on the machine side Serial communication data Serial reception READY (FAX side) Power OFF signal Video data from FAX PWB Data transfer ACK signal 52 /PCLPRD IN Table B (Signals used in PCL PWB) PIN No. (CN5) 5 6 7 12 13 34 36 37 38 Signal name /PREADY FTXD /FRTS /F-RESET /HSYNC /FPAGE /READY FRXD /FCTS IN/OUT IN OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT IN IN Descriptions PCL PWB recognition signal Serial communication data Serial reception READY (Machine side) Reset signal Horizontal sync signal Page data READY READY signal on the machine side Serial communication data Serial reception READY (PCL side) Video data from PCL PWB

(4) 1284/USB circuit select control section

The GDI/USB PWB is connected to CN15 connector to control switching between IEEE1284 port and USB port. If USB cable isnt connected to the GDI/USB PWB, the /1284-EN signal becomes LOW to allow the user of IEEE1284 port. If USB cable is connected, the /USB-EN signal becomes LOW to allow the use of USB port. Since USB has priority, when USB cable is connected, it is selected. That is, when USB cable is connected, IEEE1284 port (parallel port) is disabled.
GDI/USB CN

5V CN15 1 2 3 (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (2-D3) PARAAD0 PARAAD1 PARAAD2 PARAAD3 PARAAD4 PARAAD5 PARAAD6 PARAAD7 /REV INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB /ACK BUSY PE /FAULT SLCT /GDI-IN 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 (5-A3) (1-B1) 3.3V (5-A3) (5-A3) USB-IN /USB-EN USB-ON /1284-EN 27 28 29 30 31

31FT-BT-VK-N

12 12

AR-F152

3. FAX PWB Functional block diagram (AR-F152 only)

Speaker

LCD PWB
Prog.ROM FX164

NCU
FX200 Main Memory

PSTN

CPU Bus
LC8213 PCL/FAX MCU PWB LZ9FH19 SCAN DATA Memory Image. Bus

Image. Memory
PRINT DATA

ASIC

Buf. Mem.

4. LSI pin layout (AR-F152 only)

(1) NSFX200 (IC503) pin layout

132-Pin FQFP Package

GNDD6 GNDD8 GNDD7 VCCD7 VCCD8 CWAIT HOLD HLCA RAS0 RAS1 MA10 MA11 MA12 MA13 MA14 SEL0 SEL3 SEL1 WE0 WE1 MA9 CAS MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 MA6 MA7 MA8 OE VCCD6
83 82 81 80

115 113 111 109 107 105 103 101 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 116 114 112 110 108 106 104 102 100 HBE ADS DDIN AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 VCCD9 AD5 AD6 AD7 AD8 AD9 GNDD9 AD10 AD11 AD12 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 1 2 VCCA2 GNDA2 PTMP SBG

MA15

79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72
71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

SCVO SVI GNDA1 VCCA1 GNDD5 PMPH0 PMPH1 PMPH2

PMPH3 SMPH0 SMPH1 SMPH2 SMPH3 VCCD5 PEXT PFAIL SOSCO SOSCI RST WDT BUZCLK DMRQ3 MWSI URXD UTEN PIO0 PIO1 SNH GNDD4

AD13 AD14 VCCD1 AD15 A16 A17 A18 A19

GNDD1 A20 A21 A22 A23 PDO VCCD2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17

SDOUT

GNDD2

GNDD3

FOSCO

FOSCI

VCCD3

SPDW

SDIN

INTR

INT0

INT1

INT2

INT3

UREN

UTXD

SDFDBK

MWSO

SDIS

CCLK

CTTL

DMAK3

DMAK1

VCCD4

MWSK

SBYPS

SCLK2

SCLK1

PCLK

SLS

STB2

STB1

STB3

STB0

TL/EE/11331-54

12 13

AR-F152

NSFX200 (IC503) supplies

Signal GNDA1 2 GNDD1 9 Pin Numbers 77 82 11 25 38 51 75 90 102 116 131 76 83 5 17 32 50 66 84 96 109 125 Descrlption Analog ground. Digital ground.

Output Signals
Signal BUZCLK Pin Numbers 59 Description Buzzer Clock Programmable frequency clock for the buzzer. DRAM Column Address Strobe Column address strobe for DRAM banks refresh. CPU Double Clock Feeds CPUS OSCIN. Asynchronous. Continuous Walt Low extends the memory cycle of the CPU. General purpose output pin. DMA Acknowledge Output for DMA channel 3 acknowledge or general purpose output pin. High-Speed Oscillator Out Asynchronous.This line is used as the return path for the crystal (if used). Hold Request When low, HOLD requests the bus from the CPU to perform DMA operations or to insert idle bus cycles. Interrupt Request Low indicates that an interrupt request is being output to the CPU. 100 97 93 89 86 99 95 92 88 85 Memory Address Bus Multiplexed DRAM address.

CAS Analog Power 5V supply for analog circuits. Digital Power 5V supply for digital circuits. CCLK CWAIT

104

VCCA1 2 VCCD1 9

39 103

Input Signals
Signal CTTL Pin Numbers 33 Description CPU Clock CPU clock that is used for clocking the NS32FX200. DMA Request Input for DMA channel 3 request. High-Speed Oscillator (49.1520 MHz) Asynchronous. When an external oscillator is used, FOSCO should be left unconnected or loaded with no more than 5 pF of stray capacitance. High Byte Enable Status signal used to enable data transfers on the most significant byte of the data bus. Hold Acknowledge Issued by the CPU to indicate it has released the bus in response to a HOLD request. Interrupt In Asynchronous. External maskable prioritized interrupt requests. General purpose input pin. Power Fall Indication An asynchronous signal which forces the NS32FX 200 into freeze mode. Not used. Reset In Asynhronous reset input from the CPU. Not used. Sigma-Delta Data In Asynchronous input from the SDC analog receiver. Low-Speed Oscillator (3.2768 kHz or 455 kHz) Asynchronous. When an external oscillator is used, SOSCO should be left unconnected or loaded with no more than 5 pF of stray capacitance. Scanner Video In Analog current from the scanner sample and hold circuit. UART Recelve Asynchronous input or general purpose input pin. General purpose input pin. 12 14 RAS0 MWSK OE FOSCO 37 DMAK1 DMAK3 28 26

DMRQ3 FOSCI

58 36

HOLD

115

HBE

117

INTR

44

HLDA

114

MA1 15

INT0 3

40 41 42 43 57 64

101 98 94 91 87 24 111

MWSI PFAIL

General purpose output pin. Output Enable Used by the addressed device to gate the data onto the data bus. Not used. Not used. Output port. DRAM Row Address Strobes Row address strobe for DRAM banks 0 and 1. RAS1 is not used. General purpose output pin. Scanner Clock 2 Output, DMA Acknowledge-output for DMA channel 0 acknowledge. Scanner Compensated Video Out Analog current for use by ABC or optional video enhanement circuit. Sigma-Delta Feedback Feedback input to the SDC analog receiver. Asynchronous output signal.

PTMP RST SBG SDIN

81 61 80 19

PDO PEXT PMPH0 3

16 65 74 73 72 71 106

SOSCI

62

RAS1 SCLK1 SCLK2/DAMK0

105 22 29

SVI

78

SCVO

79

URXD

56

SDFDBK

18

UTEN

55

AR-F152 Signal SDIS/DMAK2 SDOUT Pin Numbers 27 20 Description General purpose output pin. Sigma-Delta Data Out Input to the SDC analog transmitter. Zone Select Used to adderss the device according to the selected zone. General purpose output pin. Output port. Low-Speed Oscillator Out Asynchronous. This line is used as the return path for the crystal (if used). General purpose output pin. General purpose output pin. WATCHDOG Trap Traps CPU execution when WATCHDOG detects error. Write Enable Used by the addressed device to get the data from the data bus.WE0 for even and WE1 for odd bytes.

(2) NS32FX164 (IC507)

68-Pin PCC Package
IOUT VCC GND A19 GND
27 28 29 30 31 32 33

BPU IAS

ILO NMI

ST1 ST0

A23 A22

SEL0 SEL1 SEL3 SLS SMPH0 3 SOSCO

108 110 107 21 70 69 68 67 63

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 ST2 ST3 PFS DDIN ADS SPC VCC HBE HOLDA HOLD RSTO RES RES CWAIT GND OSCIN RSTI 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 A18 A17 A16 VCC AD15 AD14 AD13 AD12 AD11 AD10 AD9 AD8 GND AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4

NS32FX164 NS32FV16 NS32FX161

A21 A20

INT U/S

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

SPDW STB0-3 WDT

23 35 34 31 30 60

60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
OSCOUT RD GND CTTL1 VCC TSO WR DBE GND VCC CTTL2 FCLK ALE AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3

WEO WE1

113 112

Supplles VCC GND

Input/Output Signals
Signal A16 23 Pin Numbers 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 120 123 127 130 2 6 118 121 122 124 126 128 129 132 1 3 4 Description High Order Address Bus The most significant eight bits of the CPU address bus. Address/Data bus Multiplexed address/data information.

Power +5 V positive supply. Ground. Ground reference for both on-chip logic and output drivers.

AD0 15

ADS

Address Strobe Controls memory access, and signals the beginning of a bus cycle. Data Direction In Indicates the direction of data transfer during a bus cycle. General purpose I/O pin. General purpose I/O pin. General Purpose I/O Pins. General purpose I/O pin. Sample and Hold Output to scanner sample and hold circuit or DMA Request-input for DMA channel 0 reques. General purpose I/O pin. UART Transmit Output.

DDIN

119

MWSO PCLK/DMRQ1 PIO0-1 SBYPS/DMRQ2 SNH/DMRQ0

47 49 54 53 48 52

UREN UTXD

45 46

Input Signals RSTI Reset Input. Schmitt triggered, asynchronous signal used to generate a CPU reset. Note: The reset signal is a true asynchronous input. Therefore, no external synchronizing circuit is needed. HOLD Hold Request. When active, causes the CPU to release the bus for DMA or multiprocessing purposes. Note: If the HOLD signal is generated asynchronously, its set up and hold times may be violated. In this case, it is recommended to synchronize it with CTTL to minimize the possibility of metastable states.The CPU provides only one synchronization stage to minimize the HLDA latency. This is to avoid speed degradations in cases of heavy HOLD activity (i.e., DMA controller cycles interleaved with CPU cycles). INT Interrupt. A low level on this pin requests a maskable interrupt. INT must be kept asserted until the interrupt is acknowledged. NMI Non-Maskable Interrupt. A High-to-Low transition on this signal requests a nonmaskable interrupt. Note: INT and NMI are true asynchronous inputs. Therefore, no external synchronizing circuit is needed. CWAIT Continuous Walt. Causes the CPU to insert continuous wait states if sampled low at the end of T2 and each following T-State. OSCIN Crystal/External Clock Input. Input from a crystal or an external clock source.

12 15

AR-F152 Output Signals A16 A23 High-Order Address Bits. These are the most significant 8 bits of the memory address bus. HBE High Byte Enable. Status signal used to enable data transfers on the most significant byte of the data bus. ST0 3 Status. Not used. U/S User/Supervisor. Not used. ILO Interlocked Operation. Not used. HLDA Hold Acknowledge. Activated by the CPU in response to the HOLD input to indicate CPU has released the bus. PFS Program Flow Status. A pulse on this signal indicates the beginning of execution of instruction. BPU BPU Cycle. Not used. RSTO Reset Output. This signal becomes active when RSTI is low, initiating a system reset. RD Read Strobe. Activated during CPU or DMA read cycles to enable reading of data from memory or peripherals. WR Write Strobe. Activated during CPU or DMA write cycles to enable writing of data to memory or peripherals. TSO Timing State Output. Not used. DBE Data Buffers Enable. Used to control external data buffers. It is active when the data buffers are to be enabled. OSCOUT Crystal Output. Not used. IAS SPecial Cycle Address Strobe. Not used. CTTL1 2 System Clock. Output clock for bus timing. CTTL1 and CTTL2 must be externally connected together. FCLK Fast Clock. Not used. ALE Address Latch Enable. Active high signal that can be used to control external address latches. IOUT Interrupt Output Not used.

(3) LC8213K (IC505) Pin Layout

I: O: B: P: NC: Input pin Output pin Bidirectional pin Power pin Not connected Pin name CS RD WR A2 A1 A0 VDD D7 D6 D5 D4 VSS D3 D2 D1 D0 Type I I I I I I P NC B B B B P B B B B NC NC IREQ DREQ DACK O O I NC NC NC NC RESET CLK VSS TEST4 VDD TEST3 TEST2 TEST1 TEST0 BREQ BACK IDREQ IDACK I I P I P I I I I NC O I I O No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 MA23 MA22 MA21 MA20 MA19 MA18 MA17 MA16 MA/MD15 VSS MA/MD14 MA/MD13 MA/MD12 MA/MD11 MA/MD10 MA/MD9 MA/MD8 MA/MD7 VSS VDD MA/MD6 MA/MD5 MA/MD4 MA/MD3 MA/MD2 MA/MD1 MA/MD0 Pin name AEN AST MDEN MRD MWR IORD IOWR LDE UDE READY DTC VSS Type O O O O O O O O O I O P NC O O O O O O O O O P B B B B B B B B P P B B B B B B B

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Input-Output Signals
AD0 15 * Address/Data Bus. Multiplexed Address/Data Information. Bit 0 is the least significant bit of each. Slave Processor Control. Not used. * Data Direction. Status signal indicating the direction of the data transfer during a bus cycle. During HOLD acknowledge this signal becomes an input and determines the activation of RD or WR. * Address Strobe Controls address latches; signals the beginning of a bus cycle. During HOLD acknowledge this signal becomes an input and the CPU monitors it to detect the beginning of a DMA cycle and generate the relevant strobe signals. When a DMA is used, ADS should be pulled up to VCC through a 10 k resistor.

SPC DDIN

ADS

12 16

AR-F152

(4) CPU interface

Terminal name CS RD WR A2 A1 A0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 IREQ Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 20 I/O I I I I Function Chip select for the CPU to access the LC8213 (low sctive). Read.Set to L when the CPU is the read out the LC8213 register. Write.Set to L when the CPU is to the LC8213 register. Address input for when the CPU accesses LC8213. Bidirectional 8-bit data bus

Terminal name MA/MD7 MA/MD6 MA/MD5 MA/MD4 MA/MD3 MA/MD2 MA/MD1 MA/MD0 AEN

Pin No. 71 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 41

I/O

Function

I/O 3 state

AST

42

This is set to L when the LC8213 is the bus master to the image memory. If AEN = H, MA/MD, MRD, MWR, IORD, IOWR, UDE and LDE will be a HiZ output. This signal indicates that an address is being output to MA/MD15 MA/MD0. This signal indicates that the LC8213 is using MA/MD15 MD0 as data buses. Not used. This signal indicates that the loworder bits of the data bus are being used. This is set to L when data is being read out of the image memory. This is set to L when data is being written into the image memory. Not used. Not used. This signal is used for the LC8213 to request usage rights from the image memory bus. Input signal allowing the LC8213 to use the image memory bus. Not used. Not used. This signal is used to delay the read/write signal when using low speed image memory or an I/O device. Not used.

MDEN O Interrupt request signal for the CPU. By reading out the INTR (interrupt request register) the CPU can find the cause of the interruption.IREQ is set to L when the CPU reads INTR. DMA request signal for the external DMA controller. This will be set to H in the following cases. Data exists in the EFIFO during the coding processes. An empty space exists in the DFIFO during decoding processes. The DBUF can read/write during data transfer between the image memory bus and CPU bus. DMA acknowledge signal from the external DMA comtroller.If DACK is set to L during coding or decoding, EFIFO and DFIFO will be accessed. DBUF will be accessed if DACK is set to L during data transfer between the image memory bus and CPU bus.

43

USE LDE

49 48

I/O 3 state I/O 3 state O 3 state O 3 state O 3 state O 3 state O

DREQ

21

MRD

44

MWR

45

IORD IOWR BREQ

46 47 37

DACK

22

BACK IDREQ IDACK READY

38 39 40 50

I I O I

(5) Image memory interface

Terminal name MA23 MA22 MA21 MA20 MA19 MA18 MA17 MA16 MA/MD15 MA/MD14 MA/MD13 MA/MD12 MA/MD11 MA/MD10 MA/MD9 MA/MD8 Pin No. 54 55 56 57 56 59 60 61 62 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 I/O O 3 state Not used. Function

DTC

51

(6) Others
Terminal name CKL RESET TEST0 TEST1 TEST2 TEST3 TEST4 VDD VSS Pin No. 28 27 35 34 33 32 30 7, 31, 73 13, 29, 52, 63, 72 I/O I I I Function External clock (Max.20NHz) Reset For testing.This is normally fixed to L.

I/O 3 state

Not used. Low-order 16-bit address and 16bit data bus for the image memory.

power supply (+ 5V) GND

12 17

AR-F152

(7) MBCG46533-175 (IC 509) Pin Loyout

Pin# Signal Description Image bus address Scanner line interuppt to FX200 INT1 pin Chip select to image memory Tigger signal to LC82103 DMA ack. sugnal to LC82103 Write strobe to image memory DMA request to FX200 Bus ack.signal to LC8213 CLK1 of the LC82103 DMA ack.signal from FX200 DMA request from LC82103 Image bus data SH signal from LC82103 Bus request from LC8213 DMA request from LC8213 Address enable signal from LC8213 Address strobe signal from LC8213 Reset signal from LBP engine Not used DREADY signal from LBP ERROR signal from LBP DCRDY signal from LBP Horizontal syc.signal from LBP SCLK signal from LBP Vertical signal from LBP Basic clock from PLL Video data to LBP DSRDY signal from LBP SDATA for LBP RESERR to LBP DPAGE to LBP DPRIM to LBP Write strobe to 16MDRAM L-CAS signal to 16MDRAM U-CAS signal to 16MDRAM CAS signal from FX200 Write enable byte on data Write enable byte on data signal for even bus signal for odd bus 1:18 IA14:IA0 19 AI_LINEINT 20 CEP_*LED 21 AI_TRIG 22 AI_*IPDACK 23 IM_*WR 24 AI_CEP*DREQ 25 AI_BACK 28 IP_CLK1 32 AI_*CEPDMAK 33 IM_IPDREQ 34: 42 IDATA7: IDATA0 44 IM_IPSH 45 IM_BREQ 46 CEP_DREQ 47 CEP_*AEN 48 CEP_AST 49 *RESET 51 VCKL 53 *DREADY 54 ERROR 55 *DCRDY 56 *HSYNC 57 *SCLK 58 VSYNC 59 PLL-CLK 62 *DDATA 63 *DSRDY 64 *SDATA 65 RES-*ERR 66 *DPAGE 67 *DPRIM 69 AI-*MWE 70 AI-*ICAS 71 AI-*UCAS 73 *ICAS 74 *IWEI 75 *IWE0 76 FX1_*RSTO 77 AI_*IRD 78 AI_*IWR 80 AI_*SANWRL 81:89 LD0:LD7 90 AI_*CSIP 91 AI_*CSCEP 92 AI_*RDKRB 93 AI_*FIFOA9

Pin#

Signal

Description Chip select signal for 64KSRAM Not used Zone select signal from FX200, Zone select signal from FX200 DMA ask.signal from FX200 Data buffer enable signal from FX164 Status signal indicating the direction of the data bus from FX164 Read strobe signal from FX164 Write strobe signal from FX164 System clock from FX164 Hold Ask. signal from FX164 Address latch signal from FX164 FX164 AD bus 1284 INT signal 1284 SELECT signal 1284 PERR signal 1284 Busy signal 1284 ACK signal 1284 FAUL signal 1284 buffered data 1284 STROBE signal 1284 SELECT IN signal 1284 AUTOFD signal 1284 buffer direction control signal 1284 interrupt signal to FX200 TEST pin FIFO RAM size select signal WIPS FIFO Data WPS FIFO write strobe WPS FIFO CAS signal WPS FIFO RAS signal WPS FIFO address signal Scanner motor phase signal Scanner motor current control signal CLK2 signal for CCD CLK1 signal for CCD CLAMP signal for CCD Scanner lamp control signal TG signal for CCD RS signal for CCD Scanner cover open signal B4 sensor signal (Not used in not-Japan model) Paper in Sensor on Scanner signal Original sensor on scanner signal

94 AI_*CSCONF 95 AI_*WRLED 98 F2_*SEL1 99 F2_*SEL3 100 F2_*DMAK0 101 F1_*DBE 102 F1_*DDIN

103 F1_*RD 104 F1_*WR 108 F1_CTTL1 110 F1_*HLDA 111 F1_ALE 112:129 AD15:AD0 132 *XINT 133 XSELECT 134 XPERR 135 XBUSY 136 XACK 137 XFAULT 138:146 BPCDATA1:BPCDATA8 148 *XSTROBE 149 *XSLECTION 150 *XAUTOFD 151 AI_1284IN 152 AI_ECPINT 153 AI_*DREQ 155 XTST 156 SW4M 157:174 AI_FIFOD0: AI_FIFOD15 175 AI_FIFO*WR 177 AI_FIFO*CAS 178 AI_FIFO*RAS 179:188 AI_FIFOA0:AI_FIFOA8 190:193 AI_SMPH0:AI_SMPH3 194:195 AI_CUR0:AI_CUR1 197 AI_*CLK2 198 AI_*CLK1 199 AI_*CLAMP 202 AI_*LAMPON 203 AI_*TGCCD 204 AI_*RSCCD 205 PNL_*SCOVER 206 *B4SEN 207 *PISEN 208 *ORSEN

Reset signal from FX164 read strobe to I/O device write strobe to I/O device Strobe signal for LD0:8 bus Buffered AD bus for slow devices access Chip select signal for LC82103 Chip select signal for LC8213 Read strobe signal for 74LS244 WPSFIFO address signal

12 18

AR-F152

5. FAX PWB circuit description (AR-F152 only)

(1) Summary
The FAX PWB performs the following operations: Interface with the MCU PWB (Scan data input, print image data output) FAX operation panel control FAX image conversion Interface with the public telephone line NS FX164 is used as the CPU, and FX200 is used as the system controller. An 8M OTPROM is used as the program ROM, and16M DRAM as the main memory. To store the registered telephone numbers, etc., 64K SRAM (backed up by battery) and the clock IC are used. LC8213 is used to perform data compression and expansion. ASIC performs laser printer control and interface with and the MCU PWB. The NCU circuit connects with the telephone line.

This IC converts bit map data into coded data in MH, MR, or MMR format or converts coded data of MH, MR, or MMR format into bit map data. In FAX sending, bit map data is outputted from LZ9FH19 to the image bus are coded in MMR format and outputted to the CPU bus. The coded data are stored in the main memory. In FAX reception, the coded data are read from the main memory and converted into bit map data by this IC and outputted to the image bus. The outputted data are sent through the ASIC to the MCU PWB and printed. The 256K SRAM connected to the image bus are used as the buffer memory.

(6) ASIC section

This ASIC of about 30,000 gates is composed of the three blocks. SCL block: Scanner control and bus control 1284 block: Interface section with PC LBP: Laser printer engine control and FIFO memory control RESET_GEN forms reset signals in ASIC, and CLOCK GEN forms clock signals in ASIC. HFKDIV divides the basic video frequency inputted to the ASIC.
ASIC Reset_gen Clock gen Hfckdiv

(2) CPU section

The NS32FX164 (having 32bit core and 16bit DSP core) is used as the CPU in combination with the system controller NS32FX200. The 32bit CPU core is used to control the system. By combination with the 16bit DSP core and the Sigma Delta Coded circuit in the NS32FX200, the MODEM function is realized. The NS32FX200 is provided with the DRAM controller function, the interrupt controller function, the timer function, and the DMA controller function, which are used to control the system.
CPU NS32FX164 System controller NS32FX200 DRAM controller Interrupt controller Timer DMA controller Sigma Delta Coded Analog circuit NCU circuit Public Telephone line
Motor control
FX data out FX AD BUS Control

ECP SCL LBP

SCL block

32bit CPU CORE 16bit DSP module

Control Scanner control

Address

Address FX data in

Bus control

FX data out Controls

FX data out

(3) Memory
A DRAM of 16M (1M 16 bit composition) is used as the main memory. An 8M OPTROM (512K 16 bit composition) is used as the program memory. The NJU6355 is used as the clock IC, and 64K SRAM of 8K 8bit is used as the configuration memory which stores various settings. These two ICs are backed up by a 3V lithium battery even when the AC power is turned off. The configuration memory is also used as the buffer memory in PC-FAX.

Lamp modulation

FX data in

DMA control Sensors

Image memory control Captur on DACK DREQ

Control

LBP READY LBP DACK/wrne Data tp LBP

Image address

(4) Scanner image storing process

ASIC (LZ9FH19) receives scanner image data processed in the MCU PWB and stores in the scan data memory. ASIC outputs image data to the image data bus and performs compression and expansion with LC8213 according to the CPUs instruction.

CCd timing conrol LC8213 Dreq out ECP Dreq out

Timing control
LC82103 DMA handshake

Image bus control

Image memory data bus Image memory address Image memory control

CTTL div2 main clock

LC82103 CCD timing

LC8213 Dreq in

CTTL from FX

(5) Compression, expansion

By combination of LC8213 and 256K SRAM, compression and expansion are performed.

CPU Bus

Compression CPU Interface Image Bus Interface Image Bus

Expansion
LC8213

256K SRAM

The SCL block performs scanner control, timing control, and bus control. The scanner control block does not use the MCU because the MCU takes an image data. The sensor block receives input of the sensor and switch state on the ADF. The bus control block performs the CPU bus control, image bus control, and DMA transmission between them. The timing control block forms CCD clock signals and DMA signals.

12 19

ECP Dreq in

LC8213 contros

LC8213 BREQ

LC8213 BACK

LC8213 DATA Image wrne Image data on

CAPTURE

Time slot

TC

AR-F152
SEL ELDATA[5:0] ELDATA[7:0] ELWR_ ELRD_ RLE CS_LBP CA[5:0]

CLK RST RDYLED

LBP module

PAPPY PA RERR LEDATA[7:0]

ECP module

DATA2FPGA[15:0]
IWR_ SCL Module IRD_ D_LBP2SCL[15:0] LBP_WE_ IMG2LBP[7:0] LBP_RDY

LERDY STALL STSCH

DPRIM VSYNC DREADY RESET ERROR DDATA DPAGE DSRDY DCRDY SCLK SDATA RAS_ CAS_ WR_ OE ADDR[9:0] DATA[15:0]

The CPU judges whether calling is made from the public line or not referring to the frequency of the NCU_RDT signal. By turning on RY501, the public line loop is closed. Then response of MFP is transmitted to the public line. (OFF-hook state). When the dial pulse is selected, RY501 is turned on/off according to the telephone number to transmit the remote telephone number to the public telephone line. In the tone pulse, the tone signal from the Sigma Delta circuit is passed through the matching transformer to the public telephone line. The NCU_LPCDT signal is generated fromPC814 (ISO503) according to the potential generated in R513. When the external telephone is in OFF-hook state, a potential is generated in R513 to drive the MCU_LPCDT signal LOW. The CPU monitors the signal and judges whether the external telephone is busy or not.

RESERR

LBP ENCINE

(8) Sigma Delta circuit

The Sigma Delta circuit converts analog signals passed through the matching transformer into digital signals. The digital signals (FX200_SDOUT) outputted from FX200 are inputted to the analog switch to generate digital switch for switching with +5V/5V. The signals are converted into analog signals in the LPF circuit.
HSYNC_

PLL

HFKDIV

The LBP block controls the laser printer engine and the FIFO memory. Since sending/receiving of command/status with the LBP engine is made in the serial line, serial/parallel conversion is made in this block to make interface between the CPU and the LBP engine. The reference video signal generated in the PLL circuit is made to the video frequency necessary for the dividing circuit. Video data are sent to the laser engine in synchronization with this signal. A 16M DRAM (1M 16 bit) is used as the printer FIFO memory, which is used as the buffer memory in PC-scan.

(7) NCU circuit

The NCU circuit has the following functions: Matching between the public line and Sigma Delta circuit (MODEM circuit) To make OFF-hook state Ring detection External telephone connection Detection of OFF-hook state of the external telephone
RY501

PLL_CLK
J[3:0] VCLK HS_

DRAM 256K x16

HC4053(IC605) +5V LF347 -5V FX200_SDOUT LPF Integrator,Comparator FX200_SDIN LM311 LF347
AMP.

HC4053(IC605) Matching transformer LIS

LF347 Reference voltage FX200_GAIN FX200_CAL

HC4053(IC516) +5V
-5V

FX200_SDFBK

On the other hand, the analog signals inputted through the matching transformer are amplified in the AMP circuit. By combination with FX_200SDBFK signal and the integrator/comparator, the FX_200SDIN signal is made and inputted to FX200.

(9) Data flow

The data flow in each reception mode is shown below.
(FAX reception) Reception operation
NCU
Prog.ROM PSTN

LCD PWB CPU Bus

FX164

FX200

Main Memory Compressed Image

LC8213

Rublic line

Matching transformer

Sigma Delta circuit

Image Bus

T501 Ring detection ISO502 NCU_RDT To CPU

FAX/PCL MCU PWB

LZ9FH19 SCAN DATA Memory

Image. Memory

ASIC

FAX/PCL MCU PWB

Buf. Mem.

R513

External telephone

Loop current detection ISO503

NCU_LPCDT

To CPU

The FAX data from the public line are stored in the 16M DRAM. In this case, the data are stored in the received format, that is in MH, MR or MMR format. When reception of one page data is completed, printing is performed.

Relay RY501 connects the public line and the matching transformer. Relay RY501 connects the DC load line and the public line. When RY501 is open, the external telephone is connected to the public telephone line. For calling sound from the public line, the signal is rectified and inputted to the photo coupler PC817 ISO502 to generate NCU_RDT signal. 12 20

AR-F152
(FAX reception) Print operation
NCU
Prog.ROM PSTN

B. CPU pin table

Pin No. 1 LED1 LED2 LCDRS LCDRW LCDB4 LCDB5 LCDB6 LCDB7 OSC1 OSC2 GND KEYCOM1 KEYCOM2 KEYCOM3 KEYCOM4 VCC TEST /PANEL RESET /SCK SID SOD LCDE KEYCOM9 KEYCOM8 LED3 KEYCOM7 KEYCOM6 KEYCOM5 Signal name Input/Output Output Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input Output Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output

LCD PWB CPU Bus

FX164

FX200

Main Memory Compressed Image

2 3 4

LC8213
Image Bus

FAX/PCL MCU PWB

LZ9FH19 SCAN DATA Memory

Image. Memory

ASIC

FAX/PCL MCU PWB

Buf. Mem.

5 6 7 8 9 10

The FAX data stored in the main memory are transmitted to LC8213, where they are converted into bit map data, which are sent to ASIC and transmitted to the FAX/PCL MCU PWB for printing.
(FAX transmission)
NCU
Prog.ROM PSTN

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

LCD PWB CPU Bus

FX164

FX200

Main Memory Compressed Image

LC8213
Image Bus

FAX/PCL MCU PWB

LZ9FH19 SCAN DATA Memory

Image. Memory

ASIC

FAX/PCL MCU PWB

Buf. Mem.

19 20 21 22 23 24

LZ9FH19 receives image data from FAX/PCL MCU and stores in the scan data memory. The mage data are transmitted to LC52113 and converted into MMR format. The converted data are stored in the main memory then read by FX200 and transmitted to the public line.

25 26 27 28

6. LCD circuit (AR-F152 only)

A. Outline
The LCD PWB is composed of the 4-bit, single-chip microprocessor, HD404344, the LCD panel, the key SW block, the LED circuit, and the shunt regulator circuit. The block diagram is shown below. The LCD PWB is composed of the key scan process block, the serial I/O process block, the LED lighting process block, the LCD display process block, the reset process block, the oscillation circuit, and the LCD power circuit. These circuits are driven by 5V, and only the LCD circuit is driven by 12V to generate 5.2V as the LCD display drive voltage.

LCD PWB Key scan section LED circuit section

LCD power circuit SOD FAX board PWB SCK SIO RESET Oscillation circuit CPU HD404344 LCD panel

12 21

AR-F152

C. LCD panel pin arrangement

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal name LCDRS LCDRW LCDE DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 LCDB4 LCDB5 LCDB6 LCDB7 VSS VDD Vin V5 GND Input/Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Remark H: Data input; L: Instruction input H: Data read; L: Data write Enable signal Not used. Not used Not used Not used Data bus line Data bus line Data bus line Data bus line 0V +5.2V +5.2V LCD drive power Frame GND

D. Key scan input process diagram

Key scan process time (A)

LCD display data process time (B)

Key scan process time (A)

input

Key SW effective period

12 22

AR-F152

MCU 1 (CPU SECTION)

5V R239 4.7KJ R240 1KJ 4

C102

C103

47p 5V D29 3 DAN202U R249 1000p 7.5KJ C283 5V

18p

(4-D4) (4-D4) (3-C1) (3-C1) (3-C1) (3-C1) (5-C1) DMT1 DMT0 MRMT3 MRMT2 MRMT1 MRMT0 /CS2 DMT2 DMT3 DAL DAH SIN4 SIN3 SIN2 SIN1 (4-D4) (4-D4) (3-B3) (3-B4) (2-E3) (2-E3) (2-E3) (2-E4)

(6-C4) PSW R247 DRST 1KJ 1 2 C296 1000p D28 DAP202U BR21 3 C242 0.1u R203 3.3KJ A5V 1 D106 AN-GND R206 68J C227 100p C225 0.1u RTH (2-D2)

[13] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

(5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (6-C4) 20KJ

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

5V

IC9 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 H8S/2350 C232 C231 0.1u 2 C233 0.1u BR22 20KJ (1-B2) (1-A2) /CS1 /CS0 0.1u

DA204K

R272 10KJ

R271 10KJ IC16 3 (8-C3) (8-C3) SDA SCL 5 6 7 8 SDA SCL /WC VCC C357 0.1u C356 22000p M24C02WBN6 VSS4 A2 3 A1 2 A0 1 5V

IC6 C205 AVcc Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0MD0 MD1 MD2 PG0/CASPG1/CS3PG2/CS2100p

BR23 47J 1 2 3 4 NF1 NF2

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A1 A2 A3 A4 8 7 6 5 R217 R218 47J 47J NFM839 NFM839 8 BR24 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 BR25 47J H8S/2350 1 2 3 4 47J

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

BR47 20KJ

BR52 20KJ

RRS PR SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 /LWR /HWR /RD

(4-D3) (4-D3) (2-C4) (2-C4) (2-C4) (1-A2,5-A2) (1-B1) (1-B2,5-A2)

CPUCLK

(5-A1)

5V C183 0.1u

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 2 20 1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 8 7 6 5 (5-B1) (5-B1) (5-B1) (5-B1) (5-B1) (5-B1) (5-B1) 330J R200 20KJ R213 20KJ R223

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 CE OE VPP

13 1
8 BR26 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 R187 47J 47J 47J R186 /LWR (1-D3) A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 /RD (2-B1) (MHPS) (2-B4) (5-C1) /CPUSYNC BR28 20KJ (SPPD) (1-D3) BR27 20KJ (5-C1) /ASICINT 5V C208 C209 100p L4 SBO-02SAN C207 R137 1KJ 5V 0.1u 0.1u C394 C393 0.1u /CS1 (1-B3) R303 20KJ C171 C11 22u 16V USB-IN 47J (8-B2) 47p R215 R202 47J 47J 47J 47J 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 47J R207 47J 8 7 6 5 C224 100p C256 100p C210 47p C211 47p C172 47p 100p C206 47p P35/SCK1 P34/SCK0 P33/RxD1 P32/RxD0 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0 Vcc PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 Vss PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 Vss PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 Vcc 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 BR36 1 2 3 4 BR39 BR38 1 2 3 4 BR37 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 D26 DAN202U C399 100p /HWR (1-D3) R201 R208 BR43 BR41 BR40 BR42 (FRXD) (/FRTS) (FTXD) (7-D1) (7-D2) (7-E1) (6-C4) KIN1 2 20KJ C200 47p (6-C4) 20KJ 20KJ KIN2 1 20KJ D11 D10 D9 D8 20KJ D15 D14 D13 D12 20KJ D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 TMON (4-C1) R214 20KJ D27 DAP202U C199 47p D5 1SS133 FW D10 1SS133 IC113E 11 10 13 IC113F R282 12 1KJ R129 C198 47p D6 1SS133 1000p 9.1KJ C139 C372 0.1u 74HC14 74HC14 C371 47p (OP-DATA) (4-A3) R139 1KJ (OP-CLK) (4-A3) 24V 5V (6-A4) R125 33KJ B C

MX27C4096

C267

L20

X1

18p

SBO-02SAN

/CS0 (1-B3)

C178

BR48 20KJ

C9 10u 16V

47p

HL /SCANST /SCANSP /PRSTART PMCLK /POFF BR49 20KJ

(4-D2) (5-A1,7-C4) (5-B1) (5-B1,7-E4) (3-A4) (7-D4)

C268

AT-51 19.6608MHz /TMEN TMCLK (5-B1) (5-B1)

18p

C181 0.1u

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 PG3/CS1PG4/CS0Vss Vss Vcc PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 Vss PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 Vss PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 Vss PA4/A20/IRQ4PA5/A21/IRQ5PA6/A22/IRQ6PA7/A23/IRQ7P67/CS7-/IRQ3P66/CS6-/IRQ2Vss Vss P65/IRQ1P64/IRQ0C255 47p C254 47p P53/ADTRGP52 Vss Vss P51 P50 PF0/BREQPF1/BACKPF2/LCAS-/WAIT-/BREQOPF3/LWRPF4/HWRPF5/RDPF6/ASVcc PF7/ Vss EXTAL XTAL Vcc STBYNMI RESWDTOVFP20/PO0/TIOCA3 P21/PO1/TIOCB3 P22/PO2/TIOCC3 P23/PO3/TIOCD3 P24/PO4/TIOCA4 P25/PO5/TIOCB4 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P63/TEND1P62/DREQ1P61/TEND0-/CS5Vss Vss P60/DREQ0-/CS4Vss

102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

(/FCTS)

(7-E1)

2 5V

C279 100p 1

IC111A 3 2 C234 100p 74VHC08 R300 47J C389 47p /F-RESET (7-D4)

C410

C173

5V

0.1u

1000p

IC5

A14 A9 A10 A12

A11

A15 A13 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D0 D1 D2

5V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A14 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 GND

VDD /WE A13 A8 A9 A11 /OE A10 /CE I/O8 I/O7 I/O6 I/O5 I/O4

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3

5V 3

W24257AJ-12

R232 10KJ

R228 10KJ R257 10KJ R258 10KJ 5V 1

C409

C201

0.1u

1000P

R224 1KJ R229 1KJ 2 C314 100p 0.1u C329 12

IC111D 11 13 74VHC08 R260 /RESET 47J (5-C1) C315 47p 1 C265 1000p 3 C269 1000p /RST (6-E3) C10 0.82u 5V IC4 1 2 3 4 5 VCC NC GND CD OUT C177 22000p C170 22000p M51953

IC7

5V

A14 A9 A10 A12

A15 A13 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D8 D9 D10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A14 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 GND

VDD /WE A13 A8 A9 A11 /OE A10 /CE I/O8 I/O7 I/O6 I/O5 I/O4

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

A11

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11

W24257AJ-12

MCU 2 (INPUT SECTION)

R182 R284 20KJ 20KJ R279 10KJ 10KJ R183 5V R195 R194 R193 1.5KJ*3 IC105 4 DVS1 (2-E4) 5V IC108A 1 SELIN1 C287 74LS07 100p 100p (TCS) (2-E4) 5V IC108B 3 SELIN2 C277 100p 74LS07 100p SELIN2O (6-B4) C278 47J 4 R234 (MMLD) (2-E3) (1-D3) R278 1 (MHPS) (1-B2) 1KJ IC113A 74HC14 R277 IC108C 5 SELIN3 C275 74LS07 100p SELIN3O (6-B4) 100p C276 47J 6 R233 MUX EN 0 C223 0.1u G 0 7 R185 5 6 SIN2 10J C203 33p (1-C4) (SDOD) (2-E3) 1KJ (1-D3) 5V IC103 2 R283 1KJ 5 6 C303 0.1u C288 47J G 0 7 R205 SIN1 10J C248 33p (1-C4) 2 R242 EN 0 (1-D3) (MFD) (2-E4) MUX (6-B4) SELIN1O C252 0.1u 4 INPUT PORT SELECT CIRCUIT 5V

5V

D21

D22

D33

R181

R180

DAN202U

DAN202U

DAN202U

10KJ

20KJ

R295

150J1/4W BR20 5 1KJ

(8-C3)

DVSEL 6 3

4 7 2

(8-C3)

MFD

(6-B2) 8 1

TCS

}
74HC151

(6-A2)

MMLD

(2-B3) (2-B1) (2-B4) (2-B3) (2-B4) (2-B1) (2-B4)

(PPD1) (POD) (MFD) (CED1) (TCS) (PMRDY) DVS1

(6-D2)

MHPS

7 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CN31

5V

1 2 3

B3B-PH-K-M

SPF DOOR OPEN

DETECTER CN 5V A5V C186 1000p 1000p 12V R188 (6-D1) /MEMORY-IN 1KJ C212 1000p D18 + 1 FTH (4-D2) 1SS133 MA700 4 BR18 5 1KJ 4 (PPD1) (2-E4) 4.7KJ 0.1u R153 C180 5V R152 10KF 2 R151 R155 1MF IC101A NJM2903 8 3 D16 7.5KJ 1.2KJ R154 R170 R123 R124 R145 7.5KJ 7.5KJ 20KJ 20KJ 7.5KJ R147 R148 7.5KJ R146 1KF 1000p 10KJ C202 C382 C362 THERMISTER SENSE CIRCUIT R189 5V

}
(PPD2) (PPD3) THOPEN (CED2) DSWS (MMLD) 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

D19

DAP202U

C185

C187

D20

D32

(2-B3) (2-B3) (2-D2) (2-B3) (2-E2) (2-B4)

1000p

1000p

1000p

DAP202U

DAP202U

7 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12

74HC151 IC104 MUX EN 0

5V

5V

D17

D1

D14

D13

R172

R171

DAN202U

DAN202U

DAN202U

DAN202U

20KJ

20KJ

C249 0.1u

}
(2-B2) (2-B1) (2-B1) (2-B4) (2-C3) (2-B2) (SDSW) (SPID) (SB4D) (SDOD) (PSH1) (PSW1) 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R143 10KJ

0 7 R199 5 6 SIN3 10J C241 33p 3 (1-C4)

(6-C1) 6 (PPD2) (2-E3) 3

PPD1

7 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12

(6-C1) 7 (CED1) (2-E4) (6-E1) (CED2) (2-E3) 2

PPD2

74HC151 5V R142 IC102 1KJ C152 C151 0.1u 1000p MUX EN 0 C222 0.1u G 0 7 R184 5 6 SIN4 10J C197 5V (1-D4)

(6-D3) 8 1

CED1

/GDI-IN

(6-C2) BR17 5 1KJ 4 (PPD3) (2-C1) 12V A5V 1 6 (PSH2) (2-E3) 1 IC109A (PSW1) (2-E3) LM358 R252 + 1 300J 4 100J 2 R216 8 3 8 (PSW2) (2-E3) DA204K D105 1 RTH-IN (6-C1) 3

CED2

(6-D2)

PPD3

(6-D2) 7 2

PSH2

}
(7-E2) (/FREADY) (7-E1) (/PREADY) (7-C2) (POFD) (7-E3) (/PAGE) (PSH2) (2-B3) (PSW2) (2-B2) RTH (1-D3) 5V R301 10KJ 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(7-C1)

PSW1

(6-D2)

PSW2

7 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12

13 2
C196 22000p 2 D107 DA204K 2 C120 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p C121 C155 C156 C154 C153 C317 0.1u AN-GND A5V 5V 12V R263 R178 620F 8 5 + 6 7 THOPEN (2-E3) IC101B NJM2903 20KJ 10KJ 20KJ 10KJ R270 R298 R285 R179 10KJ 4 R177 4 (SDSW) (2-E3) 10KF C188 22000p BR51 5 1KJ 6 (SPID) (2-E3) 3 7 (POD) (2-E4) AN-GND 8 (PMRDY) (2-E4) 1 2 BR71 5 1KJ 4 (SPPD) (1-B2) 5V 6 (SB4D) 3 (2-E3) 1 5V 7 2 R141 20KJ 8 1 (7-C1) PSH1 D104 DA204K C150 1000p R140 (PSH1) 1KJ (2-E3) C327 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p C340 C388 C385 2 B C

33p

74HC151

C253 0.1u R302 10KJ

5V 1

D15

DAP202U

C182

C176

D2

D8

D7

1000p

1000p

DAP202U

DAP202U

DAP202U

J.P12 AN-GND 0J JUMPER J.P13 0J JUMPER

D9 1SS133

R136 4.3KJ1/4W DSWS (2-E3)

2 R149 D102 DA204K 2 24V1 R2 0.22J2W (6-A1) 24V1(DSWS) D4 1SS133 R1 1KJ2W 24V1 (6-A2,6-A4) 1KJ C165 1000p

5V

D35

D31

D38

R296

R297

DAN202U

DAN202U

DAN202U

20KJ

20KJ

P-GND

P-GND

(7-B1)

SDSW

(7-A1)

SPID

(6-C1)

POD

(6-D4)

PMRDY

(7-B1)

SPPD

(7-A1)

SB4D

D36

D30

D37

C383

C384

AR-F152

DAP202U

DAP202U

DAP202U

1000p

1000p

AR-F152

MCU 3 (OUTPUT SECTION 1)

C344 22000p 0.1u 12V C345

5V 4 IC110A LEDPOD R169 CCDHI (6-E3) A5V 4 150J1/4W LEDMFD AN-GND 10u 16V 0.1u R275 IC110B 8 (1-C4) + 7 CCDLO (6-E3) 4 6 R265 2MJ DAL 5 NJM3414A C358 0.1u 150J1/4W LEDMHPS (6-C2) C15 C379 R294 150J1/4W LEDSPPD (7-B1) (6-B2) R156 220J1/4W LEDPPD2 R150 (6-D1) 150J1/4W LEDPPD1 (6-D2) 8 (1-C4) + 1 2 R266 2MJ DAH 3 NJM3414A R269 150J1/4W (6-C1)

5V

IC106C

(1-D2) PMCLK

PMCLK-A

(6-D4)

C263

74LS07

0.1u

C236

C235

100p

100p

5V

IC111C

(5-B4)

/LD

10

/VIDEO (6-D4) 3 AN-GND AN-GND

74VHC08

12V IC109B LM358 7 R274 10KF 4 L15 24V-mir HF50ACC201209 R273 5V 2200p 24V AN-GND R254 47KJ R255 47KJ 750J C16 47u 35V HF50ACC201209 R256 CP2 ICP-N38 (ROHM) HF50ACC201209 L14 13 9 1 16 L13 4 8 11 RY1 6 RSB-24 10KF C343 24V (6-A1,7-B1) 8 5 + 6

13 3
C297 C298 R248 100J 470p 470p R4 1J 2W P-GND 2.4KJ R236 300J 620J 2.4KJ R5 /MRPS1 1J 2W SLA7027MU /MRPS2 (4-D2) 2200p C342 R235 R268 R267 2200p C341 IC12 VSA VSB 7 12 OUT/A OUT A OUT/B OUT B GA GB 1 8 11 18 2 13 9 3 14 10 5 6 16 17 TDA TDB RSA REFA REFB RSB IN/A IN A IN/B IN B 4 15 C331 C355 (1-C4) (1-C4) (1-C4) (1-C4) MRMT2 MRMT0 MRMT3 MRMT1 B C

MRMT-2 SPMT-2 MRMT-0 SPMT-0

(6-A1) (7-A1) (6-A1) (7-B1) 2

C14

47u 25V

RY2 L8 4 HF50ACC201209 L7 13 C290 C316 C289 HF50ACC201209 9 1 16 8 11 6

RSB-24 MRMT-3 SPMT-3 MRMT-1 SPMT-1 (6-A1) (7-B1) (6-A1) (7-A1)

(4-D2)

C305 C322 C304 1 1000pF*8

/SMSEL

(4-D3)

MCU 4 (OUTPUT SECTION 2)

IC11 R227 (1-C4) DMT0 R230 (1-C4) DMT1 R226 (1-C4) DMT2 R225 IC111B 4 6 5 74VHC08 TD62064F/AF 24V GND GND 1 COM 8 COM (1-C4) DMT3 /DMT3 O4 (7-A2) 16 2.2KJ /DMT2 5V O3 (7-A2) 4 9 2.2KJ MTZJ22B /DMT1 O2 (7-A2) 7 D23 2.2KJ /DMT0 O1 (7-A2) 24Vdup 2 2.2KJ

24V

D34

1SS133

/SPFS

(7-B1)

R281

(5-A3)

SPFS

Q1

1.5KJ

2SD1853

3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC

1 IC3 /CPFS1 /CPFS2 /MPFS /RRS (6-B3) (6-B4) (6-B2) (6-C3) (6-B2) (6-B3) /VFM R135

P-GND

R134 47KJ E1 B1 4.7KJ1/4W Q103 2SA1036K VFMOUT C1 (6-B3)

5V 5V TD62003

(5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (1-D3) (5-A2) (5-A2) (1-D3) CPFS1 CPFS2 MPFS RRS VFM VFMCNT PR /VFMCNT /PR 24V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 GND O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 CM

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

(1-D1) 3 R261 (5-A3) SMSEL R262 (5-A3) SPUS R250 (5-A3) SGS R251 (5-A3) SRRC 2.2KJ 2.2KJ 9 8 2.2KJ IC113B 74HC14 2.2KJ 4 IC13 O1

(OP-CLK)

OP-CLK

(6-C4) 2

IC108D 74LS07

/SMSEL O2 O3 7 9

(3-E1) 3 /SPUS /SGS O4 16 (7-B1) (7-B1)

IC108E IC113D 74HC14

(1-D1)

(OP-DATA)

11

10

OP-DATA

(6-C4)

74LS07

3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND

/SRRC

(7-B1)

COM COM TD62064AF

1 8

24V

13 4
(5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A2) (5-A3) (5-A2) (5-A2) MC BIAS BIASL BIASH TC GRIDL CL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D3 1SS133 24V Q102 2SA1036K C1 E1 (5-A2) (5-A3) (5-A3) (5-A2) (5-A2) (1-D2) (2-D3) MM MRPS1 MRPS2 PMD LDEN HL FTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R103 B1 C4 + 2200p 0.47u 50V R104 4.7KJ 4.7KJ1/4W R122 47KJ C115 + C7 10u 35V 3 6 D12 8 7 TMa-O (6-A3) TMb-O (6-A3) 1 3 Q101 DTC114EKA 1SS133 2 TMON (1-C1) B C

IC2

5V 1

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 GND TD62003

O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 CM

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

/MC /BIAS /BIASL /BIASH /TC /GRIDL /CL

(6-A4) (6-A4) (6-B4) (6-B4) (6-B4) (6-A4) (6-B3)

Q104 DTA143XKA 2 IC8

3 R192 120J1/4W HLOUT (6-A4)

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 G TD62503F

O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 NC

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

/MM /MRPS1 /MRPS2 /PMD /LDEN

(6-A2) (3-B1) (3-B1) (6-D4) (6-D4) /HL /FTH

5V

C128

IC1

22000p

2 VDD

VCC1

(5-A2)

TM

9 IN1

VCC2

(5-A2)

TM-

1 IN2

OUT1

5 VSS

OUT2

R126

R133

TA7291S

47KJ

47KJ

AR-F152

MCU 5 (ASIC SECTION)

SAD0 SAD1 SAD2 SAD3 SAD4 SAD5 SAD6 SAD7 SAD8 SAD9 SAD10 SAD11 SAD12 SAD13 (6-E4) (6-E4) (6-E4) (6-E4) (6-E4) (6-E4) (6-E4) (6-E4) (6-D4) C406 0.1u 0.1u IC15 0.1u IC14 0.1u C336 C407 C339 C326 18p SWE[1] (5-C4) (5-E4) (5-E4) (5-E4) (5-D4) (5-D4) (5-D4) /LD (3-A3) /SYNC CCDD7 CCDD0 CCDD1 CCDD2 CCDD3 CCDD4 CCDD5 CCDD6 BR75 10J C334 18p SOE[0] (5-C4) SAD13 SAD8 SAD9 SAD11 SAD13 SAD8 SAD9 SAD11 SAD10 SAD10 SOE[1] SWE[1] SCS[1] SOE[0] SWE[0] SCS[0] SWE[0] (5-C4)

AR-F152

5V

L12

SBO-02SAN

X3

<1330> 22.000MHz

Vcc

OUT

R253

47J

GND

C319 (8-A2) (8-A2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-C3) (8-C3) (8-C2)

C320

C299

0.1u

22000p

4 SOE[1] (5-C4)

12p

5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 /f1 /f2 /SH CP BCLK SCS[0] C332 18p W24257AJ-12 C335 18p 20KJ C280 47p 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 1 2 BR69 30J 47J 47J 0.1u 47J 47J 47J 47J 47J 47J 47J 5 6 7 8 7 BR57 47J BR59 5V C408 BR65 BR58 BR66 47J BR61 BR54 BR67 BR60 R246 R245 4 3 2 0.1u C333 W24257AJ-12 C337 0.1u (5-C4) SD04 SD05 SD06 SD07 SD00 SD01 SD02 SD03 SD14 SD15 SD16 SD17 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 RS SP BR74 10J 5V R243 2KJ BR70 BR62 20KJ 20KJ BR63 20KJ 33p C349 33p 33p C347 33p 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ BR72 BR73 BR68 C348 C346 R241 SD07 SD06 SD05 SD04 SD03 SD17 SD16 SD15 SD14 SD13

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

SAD12 SAD7 SAD6 SAD5 SAD4 SAD3 SAD2 SAD1 SAD0 SD00 SD01 SD02 SAD12 SAD7 SAD6 SAD5 SAD4 SAD3 SAD2 SAD1 SAD0 SD10 SD11 SD12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A14 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 GND VDD /WE A13 A8 A9 A11 /OE A10 /CE I/O8 I/O7 I/O6 I/O5 I/O4 A14 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 GND VDD /WE A13 A8 A9 A11 /OE A10 /CE I/O8 I/O7 I/O6 I/O5 I/O4

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

SCS[1] C325 18p

(5-C4)

C369

C367

33p

33p

C324 18p

/USB-EN

C370

C368

(8-B2)

33p

33p

5V R244 BR55 BR64 10J 30J 10J 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 BR56

IC113C 10J L11 SBO-02SAN /SDCLK C295 100p

USB-ON

(8-B2)

5V R231 10J

74HC14 C284 C286 C285 0.1u C259 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 C271 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 C243 0.1u C264 C250 0.1u C301 C302 22000p 0.1u

X2 <1329> 13.9867MHz 8 Vcc OUT 5 GND C274 4 33p IC107

/1284-EN

C282 0.1u C270 0.1u

L6 SBO-02SAN

(8-B2)

BR53

5V

C292

20KJ

C281

IC106A

100p

100p

1 2 3 15 13 5 8 14 R221 R220 20KJ 10J SLCT (8-B2)

CNTCK CKO PULSE

9 11 4 CLK IN TEST1 TEST2 TEST3 TR GND GND GND M66236FP

R222 C261 -CKO/2 CKO/2 -CKO Vcc Vcc 6 7 10 12 16 12p

47J

(6-D4)

S/H

BR53 20KJ

74LS07

5V

R237

20KJ

C291

C273 BR50 20KJ BR34 10J 0.1u

C272 47p

IC106B 20KJ

100p

(6-C3)

OP-LATCH

(4-D3) (4-D3) (4-D3) (7-E4)

SGS SRRC SPUS /READY

R238

R219

BR46 20KJ R209 20KJ

BR32 10J

74LS07

10KJ

(4-D2) (4-D2) (4-A4) (4-D3)

MRPS2 MRPS1 SPFS SMSEL

/FAULT PE BUSY /ACK /STB /AUTOFD /SLCTIN INIT /REV R210 10J

(8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2)

VCK

(4-D2) (4-D2)

TC GRIDL

13 5
VHIHG73C025FD C396 C395 0.1u 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C239 C257 5V C228 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C398 3.3V C258 L9 SBO-02SAN 0.1u 0.1u BR29 C397 R197 R196 0.1u 47J BR30 47J L5 SBO-02SAN 0.1u C229 0.1u 47p 0.1u 47p C238 0.1u R191 A6 A7 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 1KJ 1KJ TMCLK /TMEN /PRSTART /SCANSP C12 10u 16V 10u 16V C13 20KJ BR7 20KJ (1-A2) (1-A2) (1-D2) (1-D2) (1-D2) (1-D2) BR6 20KJ BR5 20KJ BR4 20KJ BR9 20KJ C179 100p C217 100p R198 BR10 20KJ BR11 20KJ BR12 20KJ BR13 20KJ /WE /OE /CAS1 /CAS0 (6-E1) (6-E1) (6-E1) (6-D2) (6-D2) (6-D2) (6-D2) (6-D2) (6-E1) (6-E1) (6-E1) (6-E1) (6-E1) (6-E2) (6-E2) (6-E2) (6-E2) (6-E2) (6-E1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-E1) (6-E1) (6-E1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) (6-D1) /RESET (1-E1) C240 B 100p /CS2 (1-C4) (1-B2) /ASICINT /CPUSYNC (1-B2) (1-A3) (1-A3) (1-A3) (1-A3) (1-A3) MAD11 MAD10 MAD9 MAD8 MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4 MAD3 MAD2 MAD1 MAD0 /RAS2 /RAS1 /RAS0 MDATA0 MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATA5 MDATA6 MDATA7 MDATA8 MDATA9 MDATA10 MDATA11 MDATA12 MDATA13 MDATA14 MDATA15 20KJ C

BR45 20KJ

BR16 10J

(4-D2) (4-D2) (4-D2) (4-D2) (4-D2) (4-D3) (4-D3) (4-D2) (4-D2)

MC BIASL BIASH BIAS CL VFMCNT VFM LDEN PMD

BR35 20KJ

BR14 10J

PARAAD7 PARAAD6 PARAAD5 PARAAD4 PARAAD3 PARAAD2 PARAAD1 PARAAD0

(8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2) (8-B2)

(4-D2) (4-D3)

MM MPFS

BR44 20KJ R211 C260 0.1u R190 R212 10J BR19 20KJ 20KJ 10J BR33 20KJ BR31 10J /FAXCS /FAXACK /FAXPRD /FAXREQ (7-C3) (7-D3) (7-D3) (7-C3)

C244 100p

C245 100p

C246 100p

C247 100p

/PCLREQ /PCLCS /PCLACK BR15 10J

(7-C3) (7-D3) (7-D3)

(4-D3) (4-D3) (4-A1) (4-A1) (1-A3) (1-A3) (1-A3) (1-A3) (1-A3)

CPFS2 CPFS1 TM TMD15 D14 D13 D12 D11

(1-A3) (1-A3)

D10 D9

BR8 20KJ

(1-A3) (1-A3) (1-A3) (1-A4) (1-A4) (1-A4) (1-A4) (1-A4) (1-A4)

D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

R204 R176 R175 R174 R173 R168 R167 R166 R165 R164 R163 R162 R161 R160 R159 R158 R157

10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J

BR3 20KJ

/PCLPRD /HSYNC OUTD15 OUTD14 OUTD13 OUTD12 OUTD11 OUTD10 OUTD9 OUTD8 OUTD7 OUTD6 OUTD5 OUTD4 BR2 20KJ 10J 10J 10J 10J

(7-D3) (7-D4) (7-D3) (7-D3) (7-D3) (7-D3) (7-D3) (7-D3) (7-D3) (7-D3) (7-C4)

(1-D3) (1-D3)

/LWR /RD

(7-C4) (7-D4)

(1-D3)

CPUCLK

(1-D2)

/SCANST

193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

OUTD3 OUTD2 OUTD1 OUTD0 BR1 20KJ C221 18p C219 18p C220 18p C192 18p C218 18p C190 18p C191 18p

(7-C4) (7-D4) (7-C4) (7-D4)

C237

33p

C189 18p

1 This Section is 3.3V PULL UP Other Section is 5V PULL UP

MCU 6 (CONNECTOR SECTION/POWER SECTION)

5V OPE PANEL CN CN20 LSU UNIT CN C308 1000p (1-B4) DRST CN23 5V1(DSWS) (6-A1) 4 D25 D24 1SS133 R276 /VIDEO (3-A3) 100J D-GND (2-A1) 24V D-GND PMRDY PMCLK-A /PMD (3-A4) (4-D2) S/H (6-A3) /LDEN (4-D2) /SYNC (5-B4) DAN202U 3

24V

24V1

(2-E2)

ELKT

L16

C1 (2-D4) 2 1 SELIN1O (2-D4) SELIN2O

CN3

C116

22u 35V

(1-B4) PSW (1-D1) KIN2 (1-D1) KIN1 (4-A3) OP-CLK (6-A3) OP-LATCH OP-DATA (4-A3) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 B18B-PHDSS-B P-GND 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

0.1u 50V

12V SELIN3O 3.3V (2-D4) D11 L19 L17 5V D-GND 1N4005 18FE-BT-VK-N

(4-D2) /BIAS P-GND (4-D2) /MC (4-D2) /GRIDL (1-B1) FW (4-E2) HLOUT /BIASL /BIASH /TC /PR (4-D2) (4-D2) (4-D2) (4-D3) ELKT ELKT

SBO-02SAN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

L18

C107

0.1u

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

B28B-PHDSS-B

C133 0.1u CN1 (2-A3) CED1 CL UNIT CN CN25 D-GND VFM UNIT CN L10 (4-D2) HF50ACC201209 24V P-GND (4-D3) /CPFS2 04FE-BT-VK-N /CL CN21 1 2 3 4 CSS2 CN CN6 B3B-PH-K-K 1 2 3 C6 22u 16V CED1 CN C149 C8 0.1u 100u 16V

POWER PWB CN

CN29

D-GND

(1-E1) (1-E3) (1-E3)

/RST SDA SCL

CHECKER CN

1 2 3 4 5 6

TM CN

B6B-PH-K-R

CN9

1 2

(4-E3)

VFMOUT

(4-B1) TMa-O TMb-O (4-B1) 1 2 3 4 5 B5B-PH-K-S P-GND

(4-D3)

/VFMCNT

B2P-VH

24V

5V

(2-A3) (2-A3) (2-A3) (2-A3) C138 1000p C147

PPD3 PSH2 PSW2 CED2

1 3 5 7 9 11 13

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 B14B-PHDSS-B C148 1000p 1000p C130 0.1u

13 6
P-GND CN7 MHPS UNIT CN LEDMHPS (3-E3) MHPS (2-A4) 1 2 3 B3B-PH-K-S MANUAL FEED CN 24V RRS CN 24V CN11 /MPFS (4-D3) LEDMFD (3-E3) MFD (2-A4) CN12 D-GND C374 1000p C363 1000p 1 2 3 4 5 B5B-PH-K-R (3-E4) PPD1 CN CN14 LEDPPD1 PPD1 (2-A3) 1 2 3 4 D-GND C162 B4B-PH-K-S 1000p 1 2 3 D-GND DSW UNIT CN CN4 PPD2 CN CN13 (3-E4) POD UNIT CN CN22 R101 240J1/4W B4P-VH LEDPOD (3-E4) POD (2-A1) AN-GND B3B-PH-K-S D-GND C164 0.1u 1 2 3 4 (2-A3) (2-C2) LEDPPD2 PPD2 RTH-IN 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 C166 22000p D-GND B C

C129 1000p

MAIN MOTOR CN

CN18

CPFS1 CN

D-GND CN27 1 2 3 B3B-PH-K-S 2

(2-E2)

24V1

24V

/CPFS1

(4-D4)

(4-D2) (2-A4)

/MM MMLD

C145

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1000p

C193

08FE-BT-VK-N

P-GND

1000p

D-GND

/RRS

(4-D3)

MIRROR MOTOR CN

CN28

B3B-PH-K-R

(3-E2) (3-E1) (3-E2) (3-E1) (3-E2)

24V-mir MRMT-3 MRMT-2 MRMT-1 MRMT-0

1 2 3 4 5

52147-0510

24V

5V

(2-D1)

(6-D4)

24V1(DSWS) 5V1(DSWS)

C127

C101

R102

B5B-PH-K-M

AR-F152

0.1u

0.1u

240J1/4W

D-GND

MCU 7 (CONNECTOR SECTION 2)

PCL/FAX CN CN5

AR-F152

R128 (1-D4) /SCANST C141 18p (7-E1) (7-E1) R131 10J /PREADY FTXD FRXD /FCTS C140 18p R132 18p 10J C142 (7-E1) (7-D1) (7-E2) /FRTS /PAGE /FREADY (7-E2) (7-E2) /PREADY FTXD /FRTS /SCLINE

10J R130

10J /PRSTART (1-D2) 4 /READY (5-A3)

/PRLINE /FPAGE /FREADY /READY FRXD /FCTS

/POFF C143 18p

(1-C1)

C134 0.1u 12V

C135 0.1u

C137 0.1u

5V L2 SBO-02SAN L3 SBO-02SAN L1 SBO-02SAN 3.3V

(1-E1) (5-E2) (5-E1) (5-E1) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) /F-RESET /HSYNC OUTD1 OUTD3 OUTD5 OUTD7 OUTD9 OUTD11 OUTD13 OUTD15 /PCLREQ /PCLCS /FAXREQ /FAXCS /POFF OUTD0 OUTD2 OUTD4 OUTD6 OUTD8 OUTD10 OUTD12 OUTD14 /PCLPRD /PCLACK /FAXPRD /FAXACK OUTD0 OUTD2 OUTD4 OUTD6 OUTD8 OUTD10 OUTD12 OUTD14 /PCLPRD /PCLACK /FAXPRD /FAXACK (5-E1) (5-E1) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2) (5-E2)

F-RESET /HSYNC OUTD1 OUTD3 OUTD5 OUTD7 OUTD9 OUTD11 OUTD13 OUTD15 /PCLREQ /PCLCS /FAXREQ /FAXCS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 TX25-60P-23ST-H1

C118 0.1u

C3 47u 25V

C119 0.1u

C5 47u 16V

C117

C2 0.1u 47u 16V

5V

R113 5V (7-C4,7-D4) /PAGE C108 R264 R259 1KJ (2-E2) (POFD) 5V 5V 2 R119 R112 10J (1-D1) (/FRTS) C114 18p 20KJ /FRTS (7-C4) /FREADY (7-E4) C109 18p R107 10J R114 20KJ (/FREADY) (2-E3) 20KJ 18p R106 10J 20KJ (/PAGE) (2-E2)

13 7
SPPD LEDSPPD SDSW 5V (2-A1) (3-E3) (2-A2) CN10 /SPUS /SPFS /SRRC /SGS SPMT-3 SPMT-0 24V-mir (3-E2) (4-D3) (4-A4) (4-D3) (4-D3) (3-E1) (3-E2) (2-A2) PSW1 1 2 3 B3B-PH-K-M B C

24Vdup

CP1 ICP-N38 (ROHM)

CN19

24V1

(4-D4) (4-D4) (4-D4) (4-D4)

/DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3

1 2 3 4 5

B05B-XASK-1

SPF UNIT CN

CN26 5V 5V

24V

D-GND

(2-A1) (2-A1)

SPID SB4D

R117 R110 10J (1-D1) (FRXD) C112 18p 20KJ FRXD (7-E4) /PREADY (7-C4) R108 10J

R115 20KJ (/PREADY) C110 18p (2-E2)

(3-E1) (3-E2)

SPMT-1 SPMT-2

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

B24B-PHDSS-B

5V

5V

R118 R111 10J (7-D4) /FCTS C113 18p 20KJ (/FCTS) (1-D2) (FTXD) (1-D1) R109 10J

R116 20KJ FTXD C111 18p (7-C4)

MCU 8 (CONNECTOR SECTION 3)

CN30 4

CCD PWB CN CCDD7 CCDD6 CCDD5 CCDD4 CCDD3 CCDD2 CCDD1 CCDD0

(5-B4) (5-B4) (5-B4) (5-B4) (5-B4) (5-C4) (5-C4) (5-C4)

(5-C4)

BCLK 5V DV UNIT CN

(5-C4)

CP

(5-C4)

SP

(5-C4) D109 DA204K D110 DA204K

RS

(5-C4)

/SH

(5-C4)

/f2

1 1

12V 24V CN17 R304 300J SDA SCL (1-E3) R305 300J (1-E3) 1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10 B10-PHDSS-B (2-A4) TCS (2-A4) DVSEL CN17 24V

(5-C4) 5V

5V TCS (2-A4) (2-A4) DVSEL 1 2 3 4 B4B-PH-K-R

/f1

A5V

(3-C3) (3-C4) CCDLO CCDHI

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

2 2

C377 0.1u

C378

FF4-32-S15D3 D-GND D-GND

C18

C19

R286

C364

0.1u

AN-GND

10u 25V

10u 25V

5.1KJ

0.1u

C376

C365

C366

C386

C17 3

0.1u

0.1u

0.1u

0.1u

47u 16V

GDI/USB CN

5V CN15 GDI MEMORY CN 3.3V

13 8
PARAAD0 PARAAD1 PARAAD2 PARAAD3 PARAAD4 PARAAD5 PARAAD6 PARAAD7 /REV INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB /ACK BUSY PE /FAULT SLCT /GDI-IN CN16 (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-D1) (5-D1) MDATA0 MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATA5 MDATA6 MDATA7 MDATA8 MDATA9 MDATA10 MDATA11 MDATA12 MDATA13 MDATA14 MDATA15 /OE /WE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 (5-C1) MAD0 (5-C1) MAD1 (5-C1) MAD2 (5-C1) MAD3 (5-C1) MAD4 (5-C1) MAD5 (5-C1) MAD6 (5-C1) MAD7 (5-C1) MAD8 (5-C1) MAD9 (5-C1) MAD10 (5-C1) MAD11 (5-C1) /CAS0 (5-C1) /CAS1 (5-C1) /RAS0 (5-C1) /RAS1 (5-C1) /RAS2 (2-D3) /MEMORY-IN 52340-0401 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 USB-IN /USB-EN USB-ON /1284-EN 31FT-BT-VK-N B C

(5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D2) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (5-D3) (2-D3)

3.3V

(5-A3) (1-B1) (5-A3) (5-A3)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

AR-F152

AR-F152

13 9

AR-F152

13 10

AR-F152

13 11

AR-F152

13 12

AR-F152

13 13

AR-F152

13 14

AR-F152

13 15

AR-F152

13 16

AR-F152

13 17

AR-F152

13 18

FAX LCD PWB (AR-F152 Only)

5V R701 S739 S740 S741 S742 S743 S744 S745 S746 R702 R703 R704 R705 R706 S747 4 20kJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ

AR-F152

KEYSEN1 KEYSEN2 KEYSEN3 KEYSEN4 KEYSEN5 KEYSEN6 S705 S709 S713 S719 S723 S727 S706 S710 S714 S720 S724 S728

S731

S735

S732

S736

5V S707 S711 S715 S717 S721 S725 S729 S733 S737

S708 R707 R708 R709 R710 R711 R712 R713 R714 R715

S712

S716

S718

S722

S726

S730

S734

S738

20KJ S701 S702 S703 S704

20KJ

20KJ

20KJ

20KJ

20KJ

20KJ

20KJ

20KJ 3

KEYCOM1 KEYCOM2 KEYCOM3 KEYCOM4 KEYCOM5 KEYCOM6 KEYCOM7 KEYCOM8 KEYCOM9 R716 R717 R718 R719 R720 R721 R722 R723 R724 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ

5V

13 19
R745 390J LED1 5V IC701 5.2V R725 R726 R727 R728 R729 R730 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 10KJ LED1 LED2 LCDRS LCDRW LCDB4 LCDB5 LCDB6 LCDB7 D705 DAN202U KEYCOM5 KEYCOM6 KEYCOM7 LED3 KEYCOM8 KEYCOM9 LCDE S0D SID SCK /PANEL RESET KEYCOM1 KEYCOM2 KEYCOM3 R734 20KJ Q701 N,M R739 1MJ C711 R748 20KJ DTA143EKA Y701 0.1u 1 C712 0.1u 4.00MHz 2 C709 30P N,M R751 N,M C708 N,M C710 N,M VR701 10KJ R740 R741 R742 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 20KJ 20KJ R754 R735 R736 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 R10 R11 R12 R13 R20 R21 R22 R23 OSC1 OSC2 GND R30 R31 R32 HD404344 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R03 SO SI /SCK /RESET TEST VCC R33 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 KEYCOM4 3 C717 0.1u D707 C705 DAP202U 470pF C706 C707 470pF 470pF R737 20KJ C718 0.1u B C D

D701

D702

D703

R746 390J

R747 390J

5.2V

CN701-1

A12V

R731 510J 0.5W LED2 LED3

R732

2.7kF

C702 22U/16V

2 5V

R733 2.4kF

C701 0.1u

KEYSEN1 KEYSEN2 KEYSEN3 KEYSEN4 KEYSEN5 KEYSEN6

R749 20KJ IC702 LCDRS LCDRW LCDE

IC703 NJM431U

5V

D704 DAN202U

C716

0.1u

CN701-2 CN701-3 CN701-4 CN701-5 CN701-6 CN701-7 CN701-8

VCC SOD SID SCK /PANEL RESET D-GND D-GND

LCDB4 LCDB5 LCDB6 LCDB7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 R752 2KJ R750 100J

RS R/W E DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 VSS VDD VIN VS GND 1 C-LCD

J746 Jumper

C703 +

2 1

CN701-9

22U/16V

F-GND

R755 N,M

C713 N,M C719 N,M

C714 0.1u

C715 0.1u

C704 0.1u

D706 DAP202U

A C E

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (LOW VOLTAGE BLOCK)

D5 1SS270A (Option) BJ101 BEADS 2 D105 SCR101 TF321 CR3PM-8 R111 R2 103K/250V PQ12RF1 PQ12RF11 Q101 L102 160uH R107 Q102 A673 A1175 R106 101J D106 R105 221J R109 392J C103 YG802C04 FMB-24L IC102 PQ3RD23 C106 R114 181J Z0484 C109 1N4005 (Option) R112 R01J R33J(5W) D108 C108 33uF/25V 2200uF/10V C107 1uF/50V 5 R110 6 2401D R113 2101D 7 8 +3.3V +5V B1136 A1451 C19 2.2uF/50V ZD3 D104 R104 100J(Fuse) RD39ESAB1 HSS81 1SS244 R16 104J R15 R9 331J(2W) 153J 5 R103 330J(Fuse) 8,9,10 PC1-2 471K/1kV R11 223J R8 563J R116 PC817 561J R12 153J R115 R118 333J Q103 561J 472J C1213A C2785 R121 123J 6 R119 C13 104K HSS81 1SS244 7 R130 122J PC1-1 PC817 C110 223K R132 223J IC103 HA17431 TL431 L5431 R136 1001F D107 1SS270A R137 472J R131 331J C115 104K R133 5101F R134 393J D4 100J(Fuse) IC104 C1213A C2785 C14 472K R120 2 -I1 5 CT 6 RT 471K 472J R117 R122 C113 R124 C114 471K R126 103J R127 470J /PR 12 HL 11 Vcc DTCon FW -I2 +I1 +I2 C2 C1 9 4 8 1 15 12 11 16 TL494 IR9494 IR3M02 7 GND 9 E1 10 E2 13 OC 680uF/200V R7 220J(2W) Q2 14 RefOut 3 FBack C111 104K 472J 104J 15 16 C11 C10 C112 104K R123 472J ZD2 RD20 220uF/25V R125 823J 100uF/16V 3 GND 4 R10 Q1 C104 470uF/35V(ZL) 4R7J(Fuse) C12 103K C105 1000uF/35V L101 6.8uH Z0400 C9 R3 104J-474J C102 1SS270A (Option) 12,13,14 470uF/35V(ZL) D103 YG902C2R D92M-02

R5 101-271J 330-271J(Fuse) T1 Z0651 1

R6

4
SCR1 C18

AC-P07

F1 15A/125V C5

SW1-1 SDDJE-3 C8 104K/AC250V(X)

224K/AC250V(X)

F3 5A/125V

D1

L 4 3 R13 102J 100uF/35V (Option)

1N4005

222K/AC250V(Y)

TM541 BCR5PM-10 CR6PM-10 TF541

4
CN1 B16B-PHDSS-B 13 ZD101 RD30 14 +24V

L4

C4 1 2 L5 Z0202 DB1 D5SBA60 D3 ERA22-06 11 4 IC101 ERA92-02 D102 R4 104J-474J R25 3R3-150J (5W) 104J(1/2W)

R1 684J

ZR1

D2

Z0202

C6

ENC471-10D C7 472K/AC250V(Y)

1N4005

222K/AC250V(Y)

330J 2

+12V

FG

SW1-2

SDDJE-3

RY1-2

SDT-SS-124DM

K2257 K2755 K2879

CN3

B04P-XL

ZD1 RD16 HZS15-3

13 20
R129 124J RY1-1 D101 1SS270A PC3 S21ME5Y R102 273J R101 472J R108 203J Q105 C1213A C2785

VR101 5K-ohm

104K/AC250V(X)

SDT-SS-124DM

C15

R23 121J(1/4W Fuse)

TRC1 TM1641P

R22

C16 104K

121J(1/2W Fuse)

R24

101J(1/4W Fuse)

R17 104J

R20 103J

PC2

R18 104J

R21 333J

PC817

IC1

R19 223J

C17

102K

HA17431 TL431 L5431

AR-F152

AR-F152

ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 1/5

PK LB GY 1 2 3 CN22 LEDPOD POD D-GND

POD

PPD2 OP PWB 1 3 1 2

PK BL GY 1 2 3 4 5 BR GY CN902 DRST D-GND

1 LEDPPD2 2 PPD2 3 D-GND PL GY

1 2 3

PK BL GY PK BL GY PL GY

RTH

1 2

RTH AN-GND

1 2

CN13 LEDPPD2 PPD2 D-GND RTH-IN AN-GND

CN20 D-GND DRST 5V1 PSW KIN2 KIN1 OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA SELIN10 SELIN20 SELIN30 D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 18 DRST D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 18 CN901 D-GND DRST 5V PSW KIN2 KIN1 OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA SELIN10 SELIN20 SELIN30 D-GND DRST

VFM

CN21 1 VFM 3 /VFMCNT 4 P-GND

MM

24V 24V /MM MMLD GND GND 1 2 3

1 2 5 6 7 8

1 2 5 6 7 8

CN18 24V1 24V1 /MM MMLD P-GND P-GND CN27 LEDMHPS MHPS D-GND PK BR GY

MHPS

N PK GY

OR GY PL PK GY LB

LSU

5V1(DSWS) D-GND /VIDEO S/H D-GND /LDEN /H SYNC D-GND

6 1 3 2 5 4 8 7

OR GY PL PK GY LB PK GY

CCD PWB POWER SUPPLY PWB THERMOSTAT BK CN3 HLL HLN 2 3 BK WH 1 2 HLL HLN 200V EX ONLY 1 2 WH HL 1

PM MCU PWB

PMCLK-A PMRDY /PMD P-GND 24V

1 2 3 4 5

BL PK PL GY RD

BL PK PL GY RD

2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CN23 5V1(DSWS) D-GND /VIDEO S/H D-GND /LDEN LASERCNT /H SYNC D-GND D-GND P-GND PMCLK-A PMRDY /PMD P-GND 24V

13 21
CN9 1 TMa-O 2 TMb-O CN11 1 24V 2 /RRS CN7 1 24V 2 /CPFS1 BR GY CN1 1 CED1 2 D-GND CN17 PK PL GY CN14 1 LEDPPD1 2 PPD1 3 D-GND 5V SDA SCL D-GND 24V TCS DVS D-GND 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 RD PL BR GY RD PK BL GY 1 2 3 4 5 CN12 24V /MPFS LEDMFD MFD D-GND RD GY RD LB PL BR PK RD RD OR OR CN4 1 24V 2 24V1(DSWS) 3 5V1(DSWS) 4 5V 1 2 3 4 CN25 P-GND P-GND /CL 24V 1 2 3 4 5 CN28 24V MRMT-3 MRMT-2 MRMT-1 MRMT-0 CN3 24V1 BIAS /MC /TC GRIDL P-GND P-GND 24V 24V /PSOFF FW /PR HLOUT 3.3V 12V 3.3V 5V 5V D-GND D-GND D-GND 1 9 11 14 13 5 6 7 8 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RD LB PL BR PK GY GY RD RD BL PL LB PL YE PK YE OR OR GY GY GY GY GY RD RD BL PL LB PL YE PK YE OR OR GY GY GY A

TM

RRS

CN30 D-GND AN-GND CCDHI CCDLO A5V 5V 12V D-GND F1 D-GND F2 D-GND /SH D-GND RS D-GND SP D-GND CP D-GND BCLK D-GND CCD-D0 CCD-D1 CCD-D2 CCD-D3 CCD-D4 CCD-D5 CCD-D6 CCD-D7 D-GND D-GND 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

CN301 D-GND AN-GND CCDHI CCDLO A5V 5V 12V D-GND F1 D-GND F2 D-GND /SH D-GND RS D-GND SP D-GND CP D-GND BCLK D-GND CCD-D0 CCD-D1 CCD-D2 CCD-D3 CCD-D4 CCD-D5 CCD-D6 CCD-D7 D-GND D-GND

CPFS1

CED1

CED1 D-GND

1 2

BR GY

1 2 3 4

PPD1

1 2 6 5 8

24V TCS DVS D-GND BIAS

1 2 6 5 8

TCS

DV un

MULTI BYPASS VERSION ONLY

MPFS

CN10 BIAS F-GND CN11

MC GRID MCFB

RD WH RD

MFD

SINGLE BYPASS VERSION ONLY

TC BC

WH RD

DSW

DSW

5 4 1 2 3

CN6 24V1 BIAS /MC /TC GRIDL

THERMOSTAT BK CN3 HLL HLN 1 4 BK WH 1 HLL 2 HLN 100V EX ONLY POWER SUPPLY PWB L GND N INLET 1 2 WH HL

CL

Mirror

Motor

15 16 13 14 10 9 12 11 7 2 8 5 6 1 3 4

CN1 P-GND P-GND 24V 24V /PSOFF FW /PR HLOUT 3.3V 12V 3.3V 5V 5V D-GND D-GND D-GND

ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 2/5

Option
CN502 CN501 /STROBE
Data Bit 0 Data Bit 1 Data Bit 2 Data Bit 3 Data Bit 4 Data Bit 5 Data Bit 6 Data Bit 7

CN15

Option
CN16

CN701

Personal

/ACK BUSY PE SLCT

/AUTO FD XT

Computer

/ERROR /INIT /SLCT IN D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 32 31 36 33 19 21 23 25 27 29 30

1 GDI/USB PWB

5V 5V 5V PARAAD0 PARAAD1 PARAAD2 PARAAD3 PARAAD4 PARAAD5 PARAAD6 PARAAD7 /REV /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB /ACK BUSY PE /FAULT SLCT /GDI-IN D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND USB-IN /USB-EN USB-ON /1284-EN 3.3V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

5V 5V 5V PARAAD0 PARAAD1 PARAAD2 PARAAD3 PARAAD4 PARAAD5 PARAAD6 PARAAD7 /REV /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB /ACK BUSY PE /FAULT SLCT /GDI-IN D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND USB-IN /USB-EN USB-ON /1284-EN 3.3V

13 22
GDI/USB VERSION ONLY CN10 PSW1 D-GND 2 3 PL GY PL GY 1 PSW1 2 D-GND PSW1 MCU PWB A

GDI

MEMORY

PWB

3.3V MDATA0 MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATA5 MDATA6 MDATA7 MDATA8 MDATA9 MDATA10 MDATA11 MDATA12 MDATA13 MDATA14 MDATA15 /OE /WE D-GND 3.3V MAD0 MAD1 MAD2 MAD3 MAD4 MAD5 MAD6 MAD7 MAD8 MAD9 MAD10 MAD11 /CAS0 /CAS1 /RAS0 /RAS1 /RAS2 /MEMORY D-GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 3.3V 2 MDATA0 3 MDATA1 4 MDATA2 5 MDATA3 6 MDATA4 7 MDATA5 8 MDATA6 9 MDATA7 10 MDATA8 11 MDATA9 12 MDATA10 13 MDATA11 14 MDATA12 15 MDATA13 16 MDATA14 17 MDATA15 18 /OE 19 /WE 20 D-GND 21 3.3V 22 MAD0 23 MAD1 24 MAD2 25 MAD3 26 MAD4 27 MAD5 28 MAD6 29 MAD7 30 MAD8 31 MAD9 32 MAD10 33 MAD11 34 /CAS0 35 /CAS1 36 /RAS0 37 /RAS1 38 /RAS2 39 /MEMORY 40 D-GND

GDI VERSION ONLY

AR-F152

AR-F152

ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 3/5

13 23
CPFS2 2 1 /CPFS2 24V 2 1 PPD3 5V PPD3 D-GND 3 2 1 OR BR GY 14 13 11 8 7 6 4 2 1 9 1 2 4 7 8 11 12 13 14 /CPFS2 24V 5V PPD3 D-GND PSW2 D-GND CED2 D-GND FG PSW2 PSW2 D-GND 1 2 BR GY MCU PWB CED2 CED2 D-GND 1 2 BR GY 2CS UN FG FG B C

BL RD

BL RD OR BR GY BR GY BR GY GY

BL 1 RD 2 OR 4 BR 7 GY 8 BR 9 GY 11 BR 13 GY 14 GY 6

BL RD OR BR GY BR GY BR GY

CN6 /CPFS2 24V 5V PPD3 D-GND PSW2 D-GND CED2 D-GND

ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 4/5

FAX SPF UN
4

CN26

PAPER FEED UNIT Senser PWB

GY PL BL LB OR 1 2 3 4 5 D-GND SDSW SPID SB4D 5V 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 D-GND SDSW SPID SB4D 5V GY PL BL LB OR

3 D-GND SDSW 6 SPID 5 SB4D 7 5V 8 24V 11 /SPUS 12 1 D-GND SPPD 2 4 LEDSPPD 19 SPMT-1 20 SPMT-3 21 SPMT-2 22 SPMT-0 23 24Vmir 24 24Vmir

GY PL BL LB OR RD BR GY BR PK PL PK BL BR RD RD

RD BR 2 1 24V /SPUS

1 2

BL BL

SPUS

13 24
FG

GY BR PK

2 3 1

SPPD

FG

MCU PWB

PL PK BL BR RD RD

3 1 6 4 2 5

SPMT-1(B) SPMT-3(/B) SPMT-2(/A) SPMT-0(A) 24Vmir 24Vmir

SPMT

CN31

PK

2 3

LEDSDOD SDOD D-GND

BL GY

SDOD

AR-F152

AR-F152

ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 5/5

FAX-SPF UN

CN5 CN601 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 D-GND D-GND /SCLINE D-GND /PREADY FTXD /FRTS FG

CN701 CN501 A12V VCC SOD SID SCK RESET D-GND D-GND BZ1 BZ2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A12V VCC SOD SID SCK RESET D-GND D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 PK OR BL PL LB BR GY GY BL BL PK OR BL PL LB BR GY GY PK OR BL PL LB BR GY GY PK OR BL PL LB BR GY GY 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F-GND A12V 5V SOD SID SCK RESET D-GND D-GND

D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND F-RESET /HSYNK OUTD1 OUTD3 OUTD5 OUTD7 OUTD9 OUTD11 OUTD13 OUTD15 /PCLREQ /PCLCS /FAXREQ /FAXCS D-GND 5V 3.3V

FAX-OP PWB

13 25

MCU PWB

FAX PWB

BL BL 1 2 BZ1 BZ2 1 2 BL BL

SPEAKER

D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND /PRLINE /FPAGE /FREADY /READY FRXD /FCTS D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND /POFF OUTD0 OUTD2 OUTD4 OUTD6 OUTD8 OUTD10 OUTD12 OUTD14 /PCLPRD /PCLACK /FAXPRD /FAXACK 12V 5V 3.3V D-GND D-GND

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

D-GND D-GND /SCLINE D-GND NC 6 FTXD 7 /FRTS 8 D-GND 9 D-GND 10 D-GND 11 D-GND 12 /RESET 13 /HSYNK 14 OUTD1 15 OUTD3 16 OUTD5 17 OUTD7 18 OUTD9 19 OUTD11 20 OUTD13 21 OUTD15 22 NC 23 NC 24 /SCDSET 25 /SCDBCS 26 D-GND 27 5V 28 3.3V 29 D-GND 30 D-GND 31 D-GND 32 D-GND 33 /PRLINE 34 /FPAGE 35 D-GND 36 /READY 37 FRXD 38 /FCTS 39 D-GND 40 D-GND 41 D-GND 42 D-GND 43 /PWOFF 44 OUTD0 45 OUTD2 46 OUTD4 47 OUTD6 48 OUTD8 49 OUTD10 50 OUTD12 51 OUTD14 52 NC 53 NC 54 /FAXPRD 55 /SCDACK 12V 56 5V 57 3.3V 58 59 D-GND 60 D-GND

CN503

A12V A12V VCC VCC -A12V -A12V -5V H VOL0 H VOL1 H VOL2 HS OFFHK HS EN ASIG ASIGN D-GND D-GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

AR-F152

CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT (Danish) ADVARSEL ! Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. (English) Caution ! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions. (Finnish) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (French) ATTENTION Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (Swedish) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

(German) Achtung Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien. Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden. Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

AR-F152

COPYRIGHT 2000 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of the publisher.

SHARP CORPORATION Digital Document Systems Group Quality & Reliability Control Center Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2000 December Printed in Japan N